DPWH Volume 3

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS

OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
BONIFACIO DRIVE, PORT AREA
MANILA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURES
VOLUME III
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURES
(BUILDINGS, PORTS AND HARBORS, FLOOD CONTROL AND
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS)
1995
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
MANILA
FOREWORD
Prior to the merger of the Ministries of Public Highways and Public Works, the
specifications for highway construction were contained in the 1972 Standard
Specifications for Highways and Bridges, and the specifications for public works
construction were presented in various forms and styles and contained in as many
volumes as those representing the various types of public works projects such as
buildings, ports and harbors, flood control and drainage structures, and water supply
systems.
Since the construction of all public works and highways infrastructures is now the
responsibility of one single government agency - Department of Public Works and
Highways, it has become imperative that these separate specifications be reviewed,
updated, and consolidated. For this purpose a Committee was constituted to revise and
standardize said specifications.
The results of this undertaking are now embodied in the 1995 edition of the
Standard Specifications for Public Works Structures, Volume III. These specifications
have been prepared to provide all the information necessary for the proper construction of
buildings, ports and harbors, flood control and drainage structures and water supply
systems.
It is incumbent upon all engineers in the DPWH to familiarize themselves with

the contents of this volume and be guided accordingly.
GREGORIO V. VIGILAR
Secretary
VOLUME III
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURES

(Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and
Drainage Structures and Water Supply Systems)
TABLE OF CONTENT
PAGE
DIVISION I - GENERAL ................................................................. 1
PART A - EARTHWORK................................................................. 2
ITEM 800 - Clearing and Grubbing .................................... 2

801 - Removal of Structures and Obstructions ........ 2
802 - Excavation ...................................................... 2
803 - Structure Excavation........................................ 2
804 - Embankment ................................................... 2
805 - Dredging .......................................................... 2
806 - Reclamation ..................................................... 5
PART B - PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS 8
ITEM 900 - Reinforced Concrete ......................................... 8
DIVISION II - BUILDINGS .................;.......................................... 16
PART C - FINISHING ..................................................................... 16
ITEM 1000 - Termite Control Work .................................... 16

1001 - Storm Drainage and Sewerage System .......... 18
1002 - Plumbing ........................................................ 22
1003 - Carpentry and Joinery Works ......................... 31
1004 - Hardware ......................................................... 35
1005 - Steel Windows ............................................... 40
1006 - Steel Doors and Frames ...........:..................... 43
1007 - Aluminum Glass Doors ................................. 46
1008 - Aluminum Glass Windows ............................. 48
1009 - Jalousie Windows.......................................... 50
1010 - Wooden Doors and Windows ........................ 52
1011 - Rolling Up Doors ........................................... 57
1012 - Glass and Glazing......................................... 59
1013 - Corrugated Metal Roofing ............................. 62
1014 - Prepainted Metal Sheets ................................. 67
1015 - Clay Roof Tile ................................................. 70
1016 - Waterproofing ................................................ 72
1017 - Roof Drains with Strainers ............................ 77
1018 - Ceramic Tiles ................................................ 78
1019 - Wood Tiles ..........................:......................... 82
1020 - Vinyl Floor Tiles ............................................. 84
1021 - Cement Floor Finish ...................................... 86
1022 - Stucco Finish ................................................ 88
1023 - Granolithic Marb[e Work ................................ 90
1024 - Pea Gravel Washout Finish .......................... 91
1025 - Bush Hammered Finish ................................. 93
1026 - Pebble Washout Finish .................................. 95
1027 - Cement Plaster Finish ................................... 98
1028 - Synthetic Adobe. .......................................... 100
1029 - Granatite Washout Finish .............................. 102
1030 - Accoustical Ceiling ........................................ 104
1031 - Accoustical Treatment .................................. 106
1032 - Painting. Varnishing and
Other Related Works ................................ 108
PART D - ELECTRICAL................................................................. 113
ITEM 1100 - Conduits, Boxes and Fittings .......................... 113

1101 - Wires and Wiring Devices .............................. 116
1102 - Power Load Center, Switchgear
and Panel Boards ................................. 118
PART E - MECHANICAL ................................ ................................ 123
ITEM 1200 - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration

System........................................................ 126
1201 - Water Pumping System ................................. 126
1202 - Automatic Water Sprinkler System ................ 128
1203 - Electric Elevator ............................................ 132
1204 - Electric Dumbwaiter ...................................... 135
1205 - Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide, Vacuum
and Fuel Gas System ..................................... 137
1206 - Heating System ............................................. 140
1207 - Boiler ............................................................. 142
DIVISION II - PORTS AND HARBORS .................................. 146
PART F – PILING ………………………………………………… 146
ITEM 1300 - Piling To Include Sheet Piling ......................... 146

1301 - Test Pile ........................................................... 156
PART G - PROTECTIVE WORKS AND ACCESSORIES .............. 158
ITEM 1400: Mooring Fixtures ........................................... 158

1401 - Timber Waling ............................................... 160
1402 - Fender Clusters and Dolphins ...................... 161
1403 -. Rubber Dock Fenders .................................. 163
1404 - Filter Fabric .................................................. 164
1405 - Reinforcing Mat ............................................. 166
1406 - Deflector Wall. Bulkhead Curbs
and Stair Landing ...................................... 167
PART H - BULKHEADS ........................................................... 169
ITEM 1500 - Sand Mattress ....................................... 169

1501 - Rockworks ........................................... 170
1502 - Filter Materials ...................................... 172
1503 - Excavation For Bulkheads
and Reclamation ..................................... 174
DIVISION IV - FLOOD CONTROL, DRAINAGE .

AND WATER SUPPLY....................................................... 176
PART I - WATER SUPPLY....................................................... 176
ITEM 1600 - Excavation .................................................... 176

1601 - Backfill and Fill............................................... 178
1602 -Installation of Pipeline .................................... 179
1603 - Installation of Valves ...................................... 186
PART J - FLOOD CONTROL AND DRAINAGE ..................... 188
PART I-A - Earthwork .............................................................. 188
ITEM 1700 - Clearing and Grubbing .................................. 188

1701 - Channel Excavation ...................................... 188
1702 - Structure Excavation..................................... 189
1703 - Dredging ........................................................ 189
1704 - Embankment ................................................. 192
1705 - Fill and Backfill............................................... 196
1706 - Hauling and Disposal/Overhaul..................... 196
1707 - Aggregate Subbase Course .......................... 196
1708 - Aggregate Base Course ................................ 196
1709 - Crushed Aggregate Base Course ................. 196
PART I - B - Bank and Slope Protection Works ....................... 196
ITEM 1710 - Riprap and Grouted Riprap ........................... 196

1711 - Stone Masonry .............................................. 196
1712 - Concrete Slope Protection ............................ 196
1713 - Rubble Concrete/Sand or Stone Masonry .... 196
1714 - Gabions ......................................................... 196
1715 - Filter Fabric ................................................... 196
1716 - Piling .............................................................. 196
1717 - Sheet Piles .................................................... 197
PART I - C - Drainage Works .......................................................... 197
ITEM 1718 - Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains .................... 197

1719 - Underdrains .................................................. 197
1720 - Manholes, Inlets and Catch Basins ............... 197
1721 - Cleaning and Reconditioning
Existing Drainage Structures .................... 197
VOLUME III
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS

STRUCTURES
(Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and
Drainage Structures and Water Supply Systems)
Division I - General
These Specifications cover public works construction such as buildings,

flood control and drainage structures, portworks and water supply systems
including auxiliary/related structures and mechanical-electrical systems.
Unless otherwise provided herein, all applicable provisions of Volume II -

Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports shall be adopted for
the construction of the aforementioned structures.
PART A - EARTHWORK
ITEM 800 –CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Refer to Item 100, Part C of Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 801 - REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
ITEM 802 – EXCAVATION
ITEM 803 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
ITEM 804 – EMBANKMENT
ITEM 805 – DREDGING
805.1 Description
This item shall consist of the excavation of seabeds, river beds, bottoms of creeks or
esteros, and other bodies of water for the purpose of deepening or removing of silt or any
unsuitable materials or soil layers up to the required bottom elevation and grade line and disposal
of same at areas indicated on the Plans or as designated by the assigned Project Engineer.
805.2 Construction Requirements
805.2.1 Construction Survey and Reference Elevation

All elevation shall be referred to the mean lower low water (MLLW) elevation
0.00
A construction survey shall be undertaken by the Contractor under the control of
the designated/assigned Engineer to serve as basis for the computation of the actual volume of
dredged materials.
805.2.2 Equipment
The contractor shall furnish all the necessary dredging equipment to assure satisfactory
prosecution of the work.
805.2.3 Execution of the Work

The dredging work shall be undertaken by the Contractor starting from the downstream
section or within the limits indicated on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications and
approved work schedule.
805.2.4 Materials to be Dredged
All available data regarding the materials to be dredged are given in the soil investigation
reports and as indicated in the boring logs on the Plans. Materials to be dredged may range from
muck, sandy loam to coral.
The contractor may at his own initiative verify or check at his own expense all the data
regarding the materials to be encountered. He shall not be entitled to any claim against the
government in case of incorrect interpretation of the borings or laboratory test results of the soil
investigation.
805.2.5 Dredging Tolerances (Over depth)

The dredging shall be executed according to the depths or elevations indicated on the
Plans. No elevation higher than the indicated elevation shall be tolerated. An allowance of 300
mm shall be acceptable for overdredging, but in no case shall the entire dredging area shall be
dredged to the allowable 300 mm tolerance. All quantities due to overdredging shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
In case of excessive overdredging (beyond the 300 mrn tolerance) the Contractor shall on
his account backfill the overdredged areas and/ or take all necessary measures as approved by the
Engineer to protect the stability of nearby structures.
805.2.6 Dredging Slopes

All dredging slopes shall be to the specified gradient and within the limits specified on
the Plans.
805.2.7 Dredging Basins

The theoretical boundaries of dredging are shown on the Plans. The dredging shall be
carried out to the specified depth with the permissible overdredging specified in Sub Section
805.2.5.
The preferred degree of slopes between the original bottom and the indicated dredging
level is 1 (vertical) to 4 (horizontal) for layers of clay and 1 to 6 for layers of sand and silty sand
and 1 to 10 for layers of rnud or silt.
805.2.8 Dredging Adjacent Waterfront Structures

In addition to the requirements mentioned in Subsection 805.2.7 the following shall apply
for dredging carried out adjacent waterfront structures:
(a) The maximum permissible overdredging is 300 mm within the strip defined in (d).
(b) Dredging adjacent to any part of sheet pile walls on the berm specified in (d) shall be
carried out to the depth specified without overdredging.
(c) Dredging adjacent to any part of Rock bulkhead or Rock breakwater shall not be
allowed within the specified in (d). Dredging adjacent to any structure provided with toe
protection shall not be deeper than the level of the toe protection or as specified on the Plans.
(d) The limits of strip or berm mentioned in (a), (b) and (c) are as follows:
- Berm from the quayline or toe of a rock mound structure to the basin infront.
- Strip-from the outside limit of the berm and further out the basin.
- The width of the berm and strip shall be as follows:

Berm Strip
Rubble Mound Structure 5m 10m

Sheet Pile Walls 3m 20m
(e) Dredging outside the strip may proceed in accordance with sub-section 805.2.5.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of any permanent structures on the
site. During the dredging operations, the sheet pile walls shall be observed regularly for
deflection of the top edge.Temporary and permanent bench marks and reference points shall be
established for determining possible movements of waterfront structures.
805.2.9 Disposal of Spoils

All unsuitable dredged materials shall be dumped at the spoil EJea shown on the Plans or
into the open sea as directed by the designated/ assigned Project Engineer.
Good quality dredged material shall be dumped in reclaimed areas in accordance with
Item 806, Reclamation. Excess quantities shall be deposited at areas as designated by the
Engineer.
805.2.10 Articles of Value or Wreckage

Articles of value, wreakage or obstructions discovered on the site shall be reported by
the contractor in writing to the Engineer who in turn shall consult with the proper agency/official
concerned for their proper disposal.
805.3 Method of Measurement
The Engineer shall verify that the dredging between the pre and post dredging surveys,
subjected to the condition of subsection 805.2.5, Dredging Tolerances.
805.4 Basis of Payment
The cost of dredging shall be paid based on the computed volume of drp.dged materials
multiplied by the contract unit price for the particular pay item shown in the Bid Schc·jule,
which price and payment shallconstitute full compensation for dredging, handling and disposal
including labor, equipment, tools and iricidentals necessary to complete this item.
Payment Item Description Pay Unit
805 (1) Dredging – soils m3

805 (2) Dredging - coral material m3
ITEM 806 - RECLAMATION
806.1 Description
This item shall consist of introducing suitable filling materials obtained from dredging
the sea or river beds or obtained from authorized borrow areas situated beyond the right-of-way
limits of the project at locations designated by the Engineer and placed as required within the
area to be reclaimed and to the required elevation. The materials shall be of a quality satisfactory
for the purpose intended. Reclamation shall include the clearing and grubbing of sites and the
removal of all undesirable materials.
806.2 Materials Requirements

Filling materials shall consist of all types of earthen materials such as soil, gravel, sand,
shells, corals, cinders and rock of any geologic origin and any additional filler for blending
which have distinctive properties readily identified in the field and have distinct engineering
characteristics of which practical use can be made. Materials such as weeds, silt, muck and other
superfluous or organic materials are not considered suitable materials for reclamation.
806.3.1 By Dredging
Dredged material shall be secured from the dredging limits as shown on the plans or
from other sources recommended by the designated/ assigned Engineer. The materials dredged
shall be transported and deposited at the area to be filled or as directed by the Engineer. Suitable
dredges and attendant plantwith which to dredge, transport and deposit the material shall be used.
Silt and mud shall not be allowed to accumulate at the reclamation area but shall be
allowed to flow freely towards the spillway which the contractor shall construct for the purpose.
Should mud pools be formed, the Contractor shall be required to remove the mud accumulated.
806.3.2 By Borrow
Borrow material shall be secured from land sources recommended as borrow outside the
limits of the project or at locations/sites approved by the Engineer. Borrow material may be used
to supplement the materials obtained by dredging. Contractor shall construct and maintain haul
roads.The contractor shall secure borrow from sources other than those designated, provided that
the materials and location are approved by the Engineer, in which case, the Contractor shall, at
his own expense, secure the pit and construct and maintain the haul roads together with the
necessary right-of-way for such roads and the right-of-access thereto.
The materials shall be hauled and placed in positions on the reclamation indicated on the
plans.
Borrow pits when practicable shall be so excavated that they will drain to the nearest
natural outlet or to such outlet as indicated on the plans or designated by the Engineer. Side
slopes of borrow puts in all cases shall be dressed to such slope as the Engineer may direct.
Compaction Requirement
The materials above MLLW whether obtained by dredging or from borrow pits shall be
spread out and compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm preferably by at least six passes of a
vibratory roller of at least 8 tonne drawn by a tractor. The fill shall be compacted to not less than
90% of standard proctor test requirement.
In case there is a layer of very compressible clay of variable thickness underneath the
areas to be reclaimed, the filling immediately on top of the original sea or river beds shall be
executed in thin layers not exceeding one metre spread over a wide area to avoid bulging of the
soft compressible clay, until the MLLW elevation is reached. If in spite of this precaution, some
clay eruption are observed on the fill material, this clay will be removed down to the elevation of
the original sea or river bed and replaced with good material. In the event that the top sea or river
bed material is composed of soft silt, muck or organic material, the Contractor shall remove such
soft material prior to filling or filling operation should be programmed so that the soft material
can be pushed out of the reclamation area as directed by the designated/assigned Project
Engineer. The reclamation area shall be filled to the finished elevation shown on the plan plus
allowance for expected settlement. Filling of the reclamation area and the construction of the
bulkheads shall be given top priority over other construction activities.

Reclamation fill will be measured by the volume in cubic metre by the cross section
average end area method in its completed position, placed, consolidated and for fill above water
level compacted. The quantity computed from actual cross sections to the finished grade shall be
corrected by applying the anticipated settlement for a one-year period after reclamation
determined by laboratory test of the sample of soil borings to get its volume measurement at
completed position. No shrinkage factor correction shall be applied to the quantity as computed
above.The basis of computation shall be the approved construction survey conducted by the
Contractor in the presence of the designated/assigned Project Engineer.

The accepted quantities as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
cubic metre of fill in its completed position in the reclamation which price and payment except
as otherwise provided shall be full compensation for materials, labor, excavating, dredging,
hauling, placing, compacting, equipment, tools, test and incidentals necessary to complete the
item.
Pay Item No and Description Unit of Measurement
Reclamation Cubic Metre
PART B - PLAIN AND REINFORCED

CONCRETE WORK
ITEM 900 - REINFORCED CONCRETE
900.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and finishing concrete in buildings and related
structures, flood control and drainage, ports, and water supply structures in accordance with this
specification and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimension shown on the plans.
900.2.1 Portland Cement

This shall conform to the requirement of ITEM 700, Volume II (BlueBook), Hydraulic
cement.
900.2.2 Concrete Aggregates

Concrete aggregate shall conform to the requirements of subsection 311.2.2 and 311.2.3
under Item 311 of Volume II, (Blue Book) and ASTM C 33 for lightweight aggregates, except
that aggregates failing to meet these specifications but which have been shown by special that or
actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used under method
(2) of determining the proportion of concrete, where authorized by the Engineer.
Except as permitted elsewhere in this section, the maximum size of the aggregate shall be
not larger than one-fifth (1/5) of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms of the member
for which the concrete is to be used nor larger than three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars or pretensioning strands.
900.2.2.1 Aggregate Tests

Samples of the fine and coarse aggregates to be used shall be selected by the Engineer for
tests at least 30 days before the actual concreting operations are to begin. It shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to designate the source or sources of aggregate to give the
Engineer sufficient time to obtain the necessary samples and submit them for testing.
No aggregate shall be used until official advice has been received that it has satisfactorily
passed all test, at which time written authority shall be given 'for its use.
900.2.3 Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall conform to the requirement of subsection 311.2.4
under Item 311, Part E,of Volume II, (BlueBook).
900.2.4 Metal Reinforcement
Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the requirements of the following Specifications:
Deformed & Plain Billet Steel Bars for concrete Reinforcement (ASTM A 615)
Bars for concrete Reinforcement AASHTO M 31
Deformed Rail - Steel and Plain

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A 616
Deformed A x b - Steel and Plain

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A 617
If reinforcing bars are to be welded, these ASTM specifications shall be supplemented by

requirements assuring satisfactory weldability.
Bar and rod mats for concrete

reinforcement ASTM A 187
Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for (ASTM A 82)

concrete reinforcement AASHTO M 32
Welded steel wire fabric (ASTM A 185)

for concrete reinforcement AASHTO M55
except that the weld shear strength requirement of those specification shall be extended to
include a wire size differential up to and including six gages.
Wire and Strands for prestressed ASTM A 416

concrete ASTM A 421
Used in making strands for post-tensioning shall be cold- drawn and either stress-relieved
in the case of uncoated strands, or hotdip galvanized in the case of galvanized strands.
High strength alloy steel bar for post- tensioning shall be proofstressed to 90 % of the
granted tensile strength. After proofstressing, the bars shall conform to the following
minimum properties:
Tensile strength fs' 1000 MPa

Yield strength (0.2 offset) 0.90 fs'
Elongation at rupture in
20 diameter 4 percent
Reduction of area at rupture 25 percent
Structural steel ASTM A 36
Steel Pipe for concrete-filled ASTM A 53

pipe columns
Cast-Iron Pipe for composite ASTM A 377
columns
900.2.5 Admixtures
Air-entraining admixtures, if used, shall conform to ASTM C 260.
Water-reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, water-reducing and retarding
admixtures and water reducing and accelerating admixtures, if used, shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 494.
900.2.6 Storage of Materials

Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent their deterioration
or the intrusion of foreign matter. Cement shall be stored, immediately upon arrival on the site of
the work, in substantial, waterproof bodegas, with a floor raised from the ground sufficiently
high to be free from dampness. Aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid the
inclusion of foreign materials.
Notations: The notations used in these regulations are defined as follows:
f'c = compressive strength of concrete
Fsp = ratio of splitting tensile strength to square root of compressive strength.

900.3.1 Concrete Quality
All plans submitted for approval or used for any project shall clearly show the specified
strength, fc', of concrete of the specified age for which each part of the structure was designed.
Concrete that will be exposed to sulfate containing or other chemically aggressive
solutions shall be proportioned in accordance with "Recommended Practice for Selecting
Proportions for Concrete (ACI 613)" and Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for
Structural Lightweight Concrete (ACI 613A)."
900.3.2 Methods of Determining the Proportions of Concrete

The determination of the proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to attain the
required strengths shall be made by one of the following methods, but lower water-cement ratios
may be required for conformance__ with the quality of concrete.
Method 1, Without preliminary test
Where preliminary test data on the materials to be used in the concrete have not been
obtained the water-cement ratio for a given strength of concrete shall not exceed the values
shown in Table 900.1.' When strengths- in excess bf 281 kilograms per square centimeter (4000
pounds per square inch) are required or when light weight aggregates or' admixtures (other than
those exclusively for the purpose of entraining - air) are used, the required water-cement ratio
shall be determined in accordance with Method 2.
Method 2. For combination of materials previously evaluated or to be established by trial
mixtures.
Water-cement ratios for strengths greater than that shown in Table I 900.1 may be used
provided that the relationship between strength and I water-cement ratio for the materials to be
used has been previously established by reliable test data and the resulting concrete satisfies the .
requirements of concrete quality.
Where previous data are not available. Concrete trial mixtures having proportions and
consistency suitable for the work shall be made using at least three different water-cement ratios
(or cement content in I the case of lightweight aggregates) which will produce a range of
strengths encompassing those required for the work. For each water-cement ratio (or cement
content) at least three specimens for each age to be tested shall be made, cured and tested for
strength in accordance with ASTM C 39 and C 192.
The strength test shall be made at 7, 14 and 28 days at which the concrete is to receive
load, as indicated on the plans. A curve shall be established showing the relationship between
water-cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength. The maximum permissible
water-cement ratio for the concrete to be used in the structure shall be that shown by the curve to
produce an average strength to satisfy the requirements of the strength test of concrete provided
that the water-cement ratio shall be no' greater than that required by concrete quality when
concrete that is to be subjected to the freezing temperatures which weight shall have a water-
cement ratio not exceeding 6 gal per bag and it shall contain entrained air.
Where different materials are to be used for different portions of the work, each
combination shall be evaluated separately.
TABLE 900.1 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WATER-CEMENT RATIOS FOR
CONCRETE (METHOD NO.1)
Maximum permissible water-cement ratio
Specified Non air-entrained concrete Air-entrained concrete
compressive
strength at 28 U.S. gal. per 42.6 Absolute ratio by U.S. gal per 42.6 Absolute ratio by
days, psi fc kg. bag of weight kg. bag of weight
cement cement
2500 7¼ 0.642 6¼ 0.554
3000 6½ 0.576 5¼ 0.465
3500 5¾ 0.510 4½ 0.399
4000 5 0.443 4 0.354
900.3.3 Concrete Proportions and Consistency

The proportions of aggregate to cement for any concrete shall be such as to produce a
mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the form and around
reinforcement with the method of placing employed on the work, but without permitting the
materials to segregate or excess free water to collect on the surface. The methods of measuring
concrete materials shall be such that the proportions can be accurately controlled and easily
checked at any time during the work.
900.3.4 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete

As work progress, at least one (1) set of sample consisting of three (3) concrete cylinder
test specimens, 150 x 300 mm shall be taken from each class of concrete placed each day, and
each set to represent not more than 75 cu m of concrete.
900.3.5 Consistency
Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It
shall be such a consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel but individual particles of
the coarse aggregate when isolated shall show a coating or mortar containing its proportionate
amount of sand. The consistency of concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to
properly placed it and not by the difficulty of mixing water shall be determined by the Engineer
and shall not be varied without his consent. Concrete as dry as it is practical to place with the
equipment specified shall be used.
900.3.6 Strength Test of Concrete

When strength is a basis for acceptance, each class of concrete shall be represented by at
least five test (10 specimens). Two specimens shall be made for each test at a given age, and not
less than one test shall be made for each 150 cu yd of structural concrete, but there shall be at
least one test for each days concreting. The Building Official may require a reasonable number
of additional tests during the progress of the work. Samples from which compression test
specimens are molded shall be secured in accordance with ASTM C 172. Specimens made to
check the adequacy of the proportions for strength of concrete or as a basis for acceptance of
concrete shall be made and laboratory-cured in accordance with ASTM C 31. Additional test
specimens cured entirely under field conditions may be required by the Building Official to
check the adequacy of curing and protection of the concrete. Strength tests shall be made in
accordance with ASTM C 39.
The age for strength tests shall be 28 days Of, where specified, the earlier age at which
the concrete is to receive its full load or maximum j stress. Additional test may be made at earlier
ages to obtain advance information on the adequacy of strength development where age-strength
relationships have been established for the materials and proportions used.
To conform to the requirements of this Item:
1. For structures designed in accordance with the working stress design method of this
chapter, the average of any five consecutive strength tests of the laboratory-cured specimens
representing each class of concrete shall be equal on or greater than the specified strength, fc',
and not more than 20 percent of the strength test shall have values less than that specified.
2. For structures designed in accordance with the ultimate strength design method of this
chapter, and for prestressed structures the average of any three consecutive strength test of the
laboratory, cured specimens representing each class of concrete shall be equal to or greater than
the specified strength, fc' and not more than 10 percent of the strength tests shall have values less
than the specified strength.
When it appears that the laboratory-cured specimens will fail to conform to the
requirements for strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order changes in the concrete
sufficient to increase the strength to meet these requirements. The strengths of the specimens
cured on the job are intended to indicate the adequacy of protection and curing of the concrete
and may be used to determine when the forms may be stripped, shoring removed, or the structure
placed in service. When, in the opinion of the Building Official, the strengths of the job-cured
specimens, the contractor may be required to improve the procedures for protecting and curing
the concrete, or when test of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing,
the Engineer may require test in accordance with ASTM Specification C 42 or order load tests as
outlined in the load tests of structures for that portion of the structure where the questionable
concrete has been placed.
900.3.7 Splitting Tensile Test of Concrete

To determine the splitting ratio, Fsp, for a particular aggregate, test of concrete shall be
made as follows:
1. Twenty four (24) 15 cm. dia. by 30 cm long (6 in. dia. by 12 in. long) cylinders shall
be made in accordance with ASTM C 192, twelve at a compressive strength level of
approximately 210 kilograms per square centimeter (3000 psi) and twelve at approximately 280
kilograms per square centimeter (4000 psi) or 350 kilograms per square centimeter (5000 psi).
After 7 days moist curing followed by 21 days drying at 23C (73F) and 50 percent relative
humidity, eight of the test cylinders at each of the two strength levels shall be tested for splitting
strength and four for compressive strength.
2. The splitting tensile strength shall be determine in accordance with ASTM C 496, and
compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 39.
The ratio, Fsp, of splitting tensile strength to the square root of compressive strength shall
be obtained by using the average of all 16 splitting tensile test and all 8 compressive tests.
Minimum Strength, Concrete other than fill, shall have a minimum compressive strength
at 28 days of 140 kilograms per square centimeter (2000 psi).
900.3.8 Batching
Batching shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
900.3.9 Mixing and Delivery

Mixing and delivery shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.
900.4 Concrete Surface Finishing: General
This shall be in accordance with Item 407, Concrete Structures.
900.5 Curing Concrete (See subsection 407)
900.6 Acceptance of Concrete
The strength of concrete shall be deemed acceptable if the average of 3 consecutive

strength test results is equal to or exceed the specified strength and no individual test result falls
below the specified strength by more than 15 %.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless
contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of concrete represented
by the failed test result is acceptable in place. Three (3) cores shall be obtained from the affected
area and cured and tested in accordance with AASHTO T24.
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be deemed acceptable if the average of cores is
equal to or at least 85 % and no sample core is less than 75 % of the specified strength otherwise
it shall be rejected.
The quantity of concrete to be paid shall be the quantity shown in the Bid Schedule,
unless changes in design are made in which case the quantity shown in the Bid Schedule will be
adjusted by the amount of the change for the purpose of payment. No deduction will be made for
the volume occupied by the pipe less than 101 mm (4") in diameter nor for reinforcing steel.
anchors, weepholes or expansion materials.
The accepted quantities of structural concrete completed in place will be paid for at the
contract unit price for cubic meter as indicated on the Bid Schedule.
Pay Item and Description Unit of measurement
Structural Concrete Cubic Meter
Such prices and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials,
including metal water stops, joints, joint fillers, weep holes, and rock backing and timber
bumpers; for all form and false work; for mixing, placing, furnishing, and curing the concrete;
and for all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item,
except that reinforcing steel shall be paid for at the contract unit price per kilogram for
reinforcing steel metal pipes and drains, metal conduits and ducts, and metal expansion angles
shall be paid for as structural steel that when the proposal does not include an item for structural
steel these miscellaneous metal parts shall be paid for as reinforcing steel.
DIVISION II - BUILDINGS
PART C - FINISHING
ITEM 1000 - TERMITE CONTROL WORK
1000.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and applying termite control chemicals, including
the use of equipment and tools in performing such operations in accordance with this
Specification.
1000.2 Material Requirements
Termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be able to immediately exterminate termites

or create barriers to discourage entry of subterranean termites into the building areas. The
toxicants may be classified into the following types and according to use:
Type I. Liquid Termicide Concentrate
This type of toxicant shall be specified for drenching soil beneath foundations of
proposed buildings. The concentrate shall be diluted with water in the proportion of 1 liter of
concentrate material to 65 liters of water or as specified by the Manufacturer.
Type II. Liquid Termicide Ready Mixed Solution
This type of toxicant which comes in ready mixed solution shall be ·1 used as wood
preservative by drenching wood surfaces to the point of run-off.
Type III. Powder Termicide
This type of toxicant shall be applied to visible or suspected subterranean termite mounds
and tunnels where termites are exterminated through trophallaxes method (exchange or
nourishment between termites while greeting each other upon meeting).
Before any termite control work is started, thorough examination of the site shall be
undertaken so that the appropriate method of soil poisoning can be applied.
The Contractor shall coordinate with other related trades through the Engineer to avoid
delay that may arise during the different phases of application of the termite control chemicals.
1000.3.1 Soil Poisoning
There are two methods usually adopted in soil poisoning which are as follows:
1. Cordoning. This method is usually adopted when there is no visible evidence of termite
infestation. Trenches in concentric circles, squares or rectangles are dug 150mm to 220mm wide
and at least one meter apart and applied with Type I working solution.at the rate of 8 liters per
linear meter.
2. Drenching. When soil show termite infestation, this method shall be applied. The
building area shall be thoroughly drenched with Type I working solution at the rate of 24 liters
per square meter. When Powder Termicide is to be applied to eradicate subterranean termites,
careful application and precaution shall be given considering that this toxicant is fatal to animal
and human lives.
1000.3.2 Application
At the time soil poisoning is to be applied, the soil to be treated shall be in friable
condition with low moisture content so as to allow uniform distribution of the toxicant agents.
Toxicant shall be applied at least twelve (12) hours prior to placement of concrete which shall be
in contact with treated materials.
Treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of the foundation walls, grade beams and
similar structures shall be done prior to final grading and planting or landscaping work to avoid
disturbance of the toxicant barriers by such operations.
Areas to be covered by concrete slab shall be treated before placement of granular fill
used as capillary water barrier at a rate of 12 liters per square meter with Type I working solution
after it has been compacted and set to required elevation. Additional treatment shall be· applied
as follows:
1. In critical areas such as utility openings for pipes, conduits and ducts, apply additional
treatment at the rate of 6 liters per linear meter in a strip 150 mm to 200 mm wide.
2. Along the exterior perimeter of the slab and under expansion joint, at the rate of 2.5
liters per linear meter in a strip 150 mm to 200 mm wide in a shallow trench.
1000.3.3 Wood Protection

Where the application of wood preservative is necessary, the Contractor shall use Type II
working solution as recommended by the manufacturer.
All wood materials not pressure treated as specified in Item 1003 Carpentry and Joinery
shall be treated with Type II ready mixed solution as herein called for or as directed by the
Engineer.
1000.3.4 Guarantee
The contractor shall guarantee the work for one (1) year after final acceptance.
Liquid termite control chemicals or toxicants shall be measured by actual number of liters
used in the cordoning and drenching of lot areas and soil poisoning of granular fill or actual
number of liters used in drenching wood surfaces, while powder chemical/toxicant shall be
measured by kilograms applied to suspected subterranean termite mounds and tunnels.
The quantity to be paid for shall be determined and accepted by the Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 10 shall be paid for at the
Contract Unit Price for Termite Control Work which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and applying termite control chemicals including the use of
equipment and tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
Item.
Payment shall be made under:
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
1000 (a) Soil Poisoning Liter

1000 (b) Wood Preservative Liter
1000 (c) Powder Termicide Kilogram
ITEM 1001 - STORM DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE SYSTEM
1001.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment and labor for the complete
installation of the storm drainage system to include all piping’s, gutters, canals, catch basins,
junction boxes, hand holes, manholes and other appurtenant structures, and sewerage system to
include all sanitary sewer piping and septic vault where no public sewer exist, from the building
to the point of discharge.
1001.2.1 Materials for storm drainage system shall meet the requirements specified in the
following standard specifications:
Portland Cement ASTM C-150

Fine and Coarse Aggregate ASTM C-33
Reinforcing Steel ASTM A-615
Non-reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-14
Reinforced Concrete Pipes ASTM C-76 (AASHTO M-86)
Cast Iron Pipes (for conductors ASTM A-74
and downspout)
Galvanized IronPipesScheduled 40 ASTM A-120
(for conductors and downspouts)
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ASTM 2729
(for conductors and downspouts)
Where the covers for catch basins, junction boxes, manholes and canals for
gratings are required same shall be made of wrought iron and of the dimensions as shown
on the Plans.
1001.2.2 Materials for sewerage system shall meet the requirements specified in the following
standard specifications:
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings ASTM A-74

Pig Lead (for securing and sealing joint) ASTM B 29-77
PVC Pipes and Fittings (where called in Plans) ASTM 01784
Solvent Cement (for securing PVC joints) ASTM 02564
Where PVC pipes and fittings are used, joints shall be secured with rubber "0" ring or
solvent cement, as the case maybe.
Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp fiber, braided or twisted and
oil impregnated free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.
1001.3.1 Installation of Pipes
Under no circumstances shall pipes shall be laid under water and when the trench
condition or the weather is unsuitable for such work.
a. Bedding. Materials such as sand, sandy soil or any approved material shall be used to
provide a firm foundation of uniform density.The bedding shall have a minimum thickness
equivalent to one-fourth (1/ 4) of the pipe's diameter.
b. Laying of Pipes. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering and' placing pipes into
trenches in order to preclude damage. Laying of pipes shall start upgrade with the spigot end of
bell-and-spigot pipe, or the tongue end of tongue-and-groove pipe, positioned towards the
direction of the flow. The pipes shall be laid in accordance with the grades and alignments
shown in the Plans.
The spigots or tongues shall be adjusted in bells or grooves to provide uniform space
around joints to receive mortar. Blocking or wedging between spigot and bell or between tongue
and groove to attain proper spacing shall be allowed provided such blocking/wedging shall not
interfere and shall not affect the water tightness of the joint.
c. Bell and Spigot Joint for Drain Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded at the
required grade. Just below the spigot of the first unit,a sufficient space shall be provided for
engaging the bell end of the second pipe.
The spigot shall be carefully cleaned with a wet brush and the upper exterior portion
applied with mortar to such a thickness as to bring the inner surfaces of the abutting pipes flush
and even. The bell end of the second pipe shall be cleaned with a wet brush and uniformly
matched with the spigot of the first pipe so that the sections are closely fitted. After the second
pipe is laid, the remainder of the joint shall be fitted with mortar, and a bead shall be formed
around the outside of the joints with sufficient amount of additional mortar. The inside of the
joints shall be wiped and finished smooth. The mortar bead on the outside shoii immediately be
protected with a cover of wet burlap or wet earth for at least three (3) days for curing.
d. Tongue and Groove Joint for Concrete Pipe. The first pipe shall be properly bedded. A
shallow excavation shall be made underneath the joint and filled with mortar to provide a bed
second pipe. The tongue end of the first pipe shall be carefully cleaned with wet brush and soft
mortar applied around the upper half of the tongue. After cleaning and positioning the second
pipe close to the first, mortar shall be applied around the lower half of the groove. With just
sufficient thrust, the second pipe shall be brought in close contact with the first until mortar is
squeezed out of the joint. Sufficient mortar shall be used to fill the joint and to form a bead on
the outside.
e. Mortar for Joint. Mortar shall be a mixture of Portland Cement, sand and water mixed
in the proportion by volume of one part cement to two parts of clean sand with just sufficient
amount of water for plasticity.
f. Leaded Joints of Cast Iron Pipes. Joints of cast iron pipes shall be packed with braided
or twisted oil-impregnated hemp or oakum, properly caulked around the joint. The packing shall
be at least 20mm below the rim of the hub or bell and this space shall be filled with molten pig
lead in one continuous pouring. The "ring" of pig lead formed around the joint shall be properly
caulked by appropriate caulking tools to render the joints watertight.
1001.3.2 Concrete structures. Concrete structures such as catch basins, canal gutters, junction
boxes and manholes for the drainage system, and septic vault for sewerage system, shall be
constructed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications on Concrete Work.
1001.3.2Sewer Connections and Clean-Outs
a.The outlet of the septic vault shall be connected to the street drain or to other discharge
point where no sanitary sewer exists. Connection with the sanitary sewer shall not be made
without the permission of the proper authorities, but shall be made in such amanner that any and
all the service water, as well as house and other liquid wastes, will flow to the sanitary sewer.
Provided, that isolated faucets used exclusively for garden purposes may, in the discretion of the
proper authorities, be allowed not to flow into the sanitary sewer.
b. Clean-outs or rodding holes consisting of cast iron extensions with long sweep elbow
fittings shall be provided at the ends of runs and at every change of directions. Clean-outs shall
be capped with cast brass ferrules with threads and screwed-on removable brass plugs.Clean-outs
extended outside the building and raised to the level of finished grade shall be terminated with
the same cast brass ferrule with brass plug set into a concrete slab shall be 150mm thick and
300mm square, finish flush with grade.
1001.3.4 Incidental Earthwork

Incidental earthwork for the storm drainage and sewerage systems, such as excavation
and backfilling shall be undertaken in accordance with applicable part of Excavation Filling and
Grading.
1001.3.5 Inspection and Quality Control

Materials shall be inspected and accepted as to quality before same are installed.
Piping’sinstalled in trenches shall first be inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer before
these are covered or backfilled. All defects/ lakes disclosed by the water test shall be remedied to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and any extra cost shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Pipes, culverts, gutters, canals and gratings installed in place and accepted by the
Engineer, shall be measured by the meter along their axes. Catch basins, junction boxes,
manholes and septic vault shall be measured by the number of units constructed and accepted.
The quantities as determined in sub-section 1001.4 shall be paid at the contract unit price
for each of the Items which shall constitute full compensation for all materials, labor, tools and
equipment and all other incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
1001.2 (a) Pipe (kind and size) meter

1001.2 (b) Fitting (kind and size) each
1001.2 (c) Concrete Gutter meter
1001.2 (d) Concrete Canal meter
1001.2 (e) W. I. Grating meter
1001.2 (f) Catch Basin each
1001.2 (g) Junction Box each
ITEM 1002-PLUMBING
1002.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and fixtures required
as shown on the Plans for the satisfactory performance of the entire plumbing system including
installation in accordance with the latest edition of the National Plumbing Code, and this
Specification.
All piping materials, fixtures and appliances fitting accessories whether specifically
mentioned or not but necessary to complete this Item shall be furnished and installed.
1002.2.1 Cast Iron Soil Pipes and Fittings
a. Pipes and fitting materials shall comply with the specification requirements defined in
PNS/SAO 4-1: 1974. The material description and standards of manufacture are herein
described:
1. Cast Iron - the casting shall be made of gray iron which shall be sound, free from
cracks, sand holes and blow holes. They shall be uniformly low hardness that permits drilling
and cutting by ordinary methods. Pipes and fittings shall be true to pattern and of compact closed
grained structure.
2. Quality of Iron - the iron shall be made by the cupola, air furnace, electric furnace or
other processes which shall be checked by regular chemical and physical control test. The
resultant shall be gray iron of good quality.
3. Manufacture - the pipes shall be made with hub and spigot ends or hub ends only. All
hubs for pipes and fittings shall be provided with held lead grooves and all spigot ends shall be
made with beads or plain if machine cast centrifugally. Plugs shall be wrought or cast, machined
to the dimensions required and shall be free from defects.
4. Freedom from defects - pipes and fittings shall be true, smooth and cylindrical, their
inner and outer surfaces being as nearly concentric as practicable. They shall be in all aspects,
sound and good casting free from laps, pin holes or other imperiections and shall be neatly
dressed and carefully fettled. The ends shall be finished reasonably square to their axes.
b. Clean-outs shall be made of heavy cast brass ferrule with counter sunk screw cover
same diameter as the pipe except that they shall not be larger than 100mm diameter.
c. Caulking lead shall be of molten type peg lead conforming to specification
requirements defined in ASTM 8-29.
d. Oakum shall be twisted or braided hemp or abaca fibers slightly impregnated with oil.
1002.2.2 WATER SUPPLY Pipes and Fittings
a. Pipes shall be galvanized iron pipe schedule 40 conforming to specification

requirements defined in ASTM A-120 with threaded connection. Under roads where necessary
shall be suitably protected as shown on the Plans.
Fittings shall be malleable iron Type II, galvanized iron conforming to specification
requirements defined in ASTM A338.
b.Valves
Valves for water supply shall be bronze body with threaded ends rated 21.0 kgf/cm.
square, All valves shall be gate valves unless otherwise specified. Gate valves shall have solid
wedge body and discs conforming to specification requirements defined in ASTM 8-62. Globe
valves shall have plug type discs with ferrule threaded ends and bronze body.
c. Unions
Unions on ferrous pipe 50mm in diameter and smaller shall be malleable iron.
d. Water Meter
Water meter where required to be furnished by the Contractor shall be of the type
tested and approved by MWSS.
1002.2.3 Approved Alternate Pipes and Fittings
Pipes and fittings for sanitary and potable water lines as approved alternate shall be Un
plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes and Fittings (UPVC).
Pipes and fittings shall be made of virgin materials conforming to specification
requirements defined in ASTM 0-2241 and PNS 65: 1986. Fittings shall be molded type and
designed for solvent cement joint connection for water lines and rubber O-ring seal joint for
sanitary lines.
1002.2.4 Septic Tank

The septic tank shall be provided as shown on the Plans including all pipe vents and
fittings. The various construction materials such as concrete masonry work shall conform to the
corresponding Items of these Specifications. Inlet and outlet pipes shall conform to the latest
edition of the National Plumbing Code.
1002.2.5 Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings

All fittings and trimmings for fixtures shall be chromium-plated and polished brass unless
otherwise approved. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures shall be connected to the
roughing in, piping system at the wall unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. Built-in fixtures
shall be watertight with provision of water supply and drainage outlet, fittings and trap seal.
Unless otherwise specified, all plumbing fixtures shall be made of vitreous china complete with
fittings.
a.Water closet shall be vitreous china, free standing toilet combination, round front
bottom outlet symphonicwash down bowl with extended rear self and closed coupled tank with
cover complete with fittings and mounting accessories. Model make and color shall be submitted
for approval prior to delivery at jobsite by the Engineer.
b.Lavatory shall be vitreous china, wall-hung with rear overflow and cast-in soap dishes,
pocket hanger with integral china brackets, complete with twin faucets, supply pipes, P-trap and
mounting accessories. Where indicated on the Plans to be counter top model make and color
shall be approved by the Engineer.
c.Urinal shall be china vitreous, wall-hung wash-out urinal with extended shields and
integral flush spreader, concealed wall-hanger pockets, 19mm top spud complete with fitting and
mounting accessories.Model make and color shall be approved by the Engineer.
1002.2.6Bathroom and Toilet Accessories
a.Shower head and fitting shall be movable, cone type with escutcheon arm complete
with stainless steel shower valve and control lever, all exposed surface to be chromium finish.
b.Grab bars shall be made of tubular stainless steel pipe provided with safety grip and
mounting flange.
c.Floor drains shall be made of stainless steel beehive type, measuring 100mm x
100mm, and provided with detachable stainless strainer, expanded metal lath type.
d.Toilet paper holder shall be vitreous china wall mounted. Color shall reconcile with
the adjacent fixture and facing tiles.
e.Soap holder shall be vitreous china wall mounted. Color shall reconcile with the
adjacent tile works.
f.Faucet(s) shall be made of stainless steel for interior use.
g.Hose-bib(s) shall be made of bronze cast finish.
1002.2.7Special Plumbing Fixtures

a.Kitchen sink shall be made of stainless steel self rimming, single compartment
complete with supply fittings, strainer traps, dual control lever and other accessories.
b.Laboratory sink shall be made of cast iron metal with white porcelain finish with
single compartment, flat rim ledge, 762mm x 533mm complete with supply fittings, strainer, trap
and other accessories.
c.Scrub-up sink shall be made of cast iron metal with white porcelain finish
measuring 610mm x 610mm complete with supply fittings, strainer, trap and wall mounting
accessories.
d.X-ray developing tank shall be made of cast iron white porcelain finish with three
(3) compartment x-ray processing tank, drain plug, open standing drain, 19mm IPS inlet spud
complete with stand and mounting accessories.
e.Squat bowl(s) shall be vitreous china, wash down squat bowl with integral foot
treads, pail flush type. Color, make and type to be approved by the Engineer.
f.Grease traps shall be made of cast bronze with detachable cover and mounting
accessories.
1002.2.8 Roof Drains, Downspout, Overflow Pipes and Steel Grating
The Contractor shall provide, fit and/or install necessary drains with strainers, where
shown on the Plans. Each drain with strainer shall fit the size of the corresponding downspout (or
roof leader) over which it is to be installed and in conformity with the following schedule:
a.Scrupper drains (for balconies, parapet) shall be made of bronze base with flashing.
Flange threaded outlet and convex with integral flashing clamp bolted to flange.
b."Josam" type drains shall be made of bronze base semi-dome with large free area,
flashing clamp and integral gravel stopper. To be used at roof decks, canopies, gutters, and
elsewhere indicated on the Plans.
c.Downspouts when encased in concrete, unless otherwise shown on the Plans shall
be polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Whether indicated or specified to be cast iron or galvanized iron
the same shall meet the specification requirement as herein described.
d.Overflow pipes shall be made of galvanized iron pipe measuring at least 13mm
diameter and spaced 200mm on center.
e.Steel grating shall be made of wrought iron metals of design on shop drawings
approved and surfaces to be coated with shop finish.
1002.2.9 Fire Protection System
a. Fire hose cabinets shall be locally available consisting of 38mm diameter valve hose
rack with nipple 30mm rubber lined hose cable with standing 4268 kg/cm square,
nozzle 38mm diameter brass, chromium plated.
b. Fire standpipe system shall consist of risers and hose valves. Pipe shall be extra
strong black iron. Valves to be high grade cast bronze mounted withstanding 79.40
kg. working pressure as indicated on the Plans.
c. Fire extinguisher shall be portable, suitable for Class A, B, C fires, mounted inside
cabinet. Cabinet shall be full flush mounting door with aluminum trim for glass plate,
frame and box shall be made of gauge 14 galvanized iron sheet with white interior
and red exterior baked enamel finish over primer. Cabinet to be wall mounted and
size to be able to accommodate the defined components.
d. Yard hydrant where shown on the Plans shall match the Integrated Fire Department
requirements. Outlet shall be single 63mm diameter gate valves with chain connected
caps.
1002.2.10 Built-in appliances such as urinal trough, lavatory and slope sink shall be made as
indicated on the Plans, exposed surfaces to be tile wainscoating Complete with fitting accessories
required as practiced in this specialty trade.
1002.3 Construction Requirement
The Contractor before any installation work is started shall carefully examine the Plans
and shall investigate actual structural and finishing work condition affecting all his work. Where
actual condition necessitates a rearrangement of the approved pipe layout, the Contractor shall
prepare Plan(s) of the proposed pipe layout for approval by the Engineer.
1002.3.1Installation of Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Pipes
a.All cast iron soil and drainage pipes shall be pitch 6mm per 300mm but in no case
flatter than 3mm per 300mm.
b.Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured length heavy strap hangers.
Vertical lines shall be secured strongly by hooks to the building frame and a suitable brackets or
chairs shall be provided at the floor from which they start.
c.All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and above the
roof line to act as vents, except otherwise indicated on the Plans.
d.Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to underside of roof with
horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps. Vertical vent pipes may be
connected into one main vent riser above the highest vented fixtures.
e.Where an end or circuit vent pipe from any fixtures is connected to a vent line
serving other fixtures, the connections shall be at least 1.20 m above the floor on which the
fixtures are located.
f.Horizontal waste line receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be
provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted on the Plans.
g.All changes in pipe sizes on soil and waste lines shall be made with reducing
fittings or recessed reducers. All changes in directions shall be made by appropriate use of 45
degree wyes, half wyes, long sweep quarter bends or elbows may be used in soil and waste lines
where the change in direction of flow is from the horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge
from waste closets. Where it becomes necessary to use short radius fittings in other locations the
approval of the Engineer shall be obtained prior to installation of the same.
h.All joints of cast iron pipes in bell and spigot shall be firmly packed with oakum or
hemp and caulked with pig lead at least 25 mm deep.
i.Cleanouts at the bottom of each soilstack, wastestack, interior downspout and where
else indicated shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 102 mm . 152 mm, for larger
pipes.
Cleanouts on floors shall be cast iron ferrule caulked into cast hub and fitted with cast
brass screw plug flush with floor. Cleanouts for threaded pipes snail be installed at the foot of
soil, waste and drain stacks and on each building drain outside the building.
j.Vent pipe shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with ferrule lead sheet.
Flashing shall be turned down into pipes.
k.Each fixtures and place of equipment requiring connection to the drainage system
except fixtures with continuous waste shall be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as
near to the fixture as possible.Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recessed drainage pattern.
l.Overhead horizontal runs of pipes shall be hung with adjustable wrought iron pipe
hanger spaced not over 3.04 m apart except hub and spigot soil pipe which shall have hanger
spaced not over 1.50 m apart and located near a hub.
1002.3.2 Water Pipes, Fittings and Connections.

All water pipings inside the building and underground, 100 mm.diameter and smaller
shall be galvanized iron threaded pipe with malleable iron fittings.
a.The water piping shall be extended to 'all fixtures, outlets, and equipment from the gate
valves installed in the branch near the riser.
b.The cold water system shall be installed with a fall towards a main shutoff valve and
drain. Ends of pipes and outlets shall be capped or plugged and left ready for future connections.
c.Mains and Branches
1.All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements and shall be worked into place
without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken so as not to weaken the structural portions of
the building.
2.All piping above the ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans.
3.All service pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work
to permit finished covering not less than 12.5mm from such work or from finished covering on
the different service.
4.No water piping shall be buried in floors, unless specifically indicated on the Plans and
approved by the Engineer.
5.Changes in pipes shall be made with reducing fittings.
d. Drain Cocks
1. Pipe drain indicated on the drawings shall consist of 12 mm globe valve with
renewable disc and installed at low points on the cold water piping so that all piping shall slope
100 mm in 30.5 m.
e. Threaded Pipe Joints
1. All pipes shall be reamed before threading. All screw joints shall be made with
graphite and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to make threads only. Threads
shall be full cut and not more than three threads on the pipe shall remain exposed.
f. Expansion and Contraction of Pipes
Accessible contraction-expansion joints shall be made whenever necessary.
Horizontal runs of pipe over 15m in length shall be anchored to the wall to the
supporting structure about midway on the run to force expansion and contraction
equally toward the ends or as shown on the Plans.
g.Fire Standpipe System

Fire standpipe system shall consist of risers and hose valve. Pipe shall be extra strong
black iron. Valves to be underwriter's approval high grade cast bronze mounted.
h. Valves and Hose Bibs
1.Valves shall be provided on all supplied fixture as herein specified.

2.The cold water connections to the domestic hot water heater shall be provided with gate
valves and the return circulation connection shall have gate and a check valve.
3.All connection to domestic hot water heaters shall be equipped with unions between
valve and tanks.
4.Valve shall not be installed with its stem below the horizontal. All valves shall be gate
valves unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
5.Valves up to and including 50 mm diameter shall be threaded ends, rough bodies and
finished trimmings, except those on chromium plated brass pipe.
6.Valves 63 mm in diameter and larger shall have iron bodies, brass mounted and shall
have either screws or flange ends.
7.Hose bibs shall be made of brass with 12.5 mm inlet threads, hexagon shoulders and 19
mm male.
1002.3.3Fixtures, Equipment and Fastenings
a.All fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a safe and satisfactory
workmanship as practiced.
b.All fixtures, where required to be wall mounted on concrete or concrete hollow
block wall, fasten with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall be 6 mm diameter with 20
mm threads to 25 mm into solid concrete, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves of proper length to
acquire extreme rigidity.
c.Inserts shall be securely anchored and properly flushed into the walls. Inserts shall
be concealed and rigid.
d.Bolts and nuts shall be horizontal and exposed. It shall be provided with washers
and chromium plate finish.
1002.3.4Pipe Hangers, Inserts and Supports
a.Pipe hangers shall be wrought iron or malleable iron pipe spaced not more than 3m
apart for horizontal runs or pipe, except hub and spigot soil pipe which shall have hanger spaced
not over 1.50 m apart located near the hub.
b. Chains, straps perforated turn-buckles or other approved means of adjustment
except the' turn-buckles may be omitted for hangers on sailor waste lines or individual toilet
rooms to maintain stacks when spaced does not permit.
c. Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate hangers on pipe running parallel to
and close to each other.
d. Inserts shall be cast steel and shall be of type to receive a machine bolt or nut after
installation. Insert may be permitted adjustmentof the bolts in one horizontal direction and shall
be installed before pouring of concrete.
e.Wrought iron clamps or collars to support vertical runs of pipe shall be spaced not
more than 6 m apart for as indicated on the Plans.
1002.3.5Plates and Flashing

a.Plates to cover exposed pipes passing through floor finished walls or ceiling shall be
fitted with chromium plated cast brass plates or chromium plated cast iron or steel plates on
ferrous pipes.
b.Plates shall be large enough to cover and close the hole around the area where
pipes pass. It shall be properly installed to insure permanence.
c.Roof areas penetrated by vent pipes shall be rendered watertight by lead sheet
flashing and counter flashing. It shall extend at least 150 mm above the pipe and 300 mm along
the roof.
1002.3.6Protection and Cleaning
a.During installation of fixtures and accessories and until final acceptance, protect
items with strippable plastic or other approved means to maintain fixtures in perfect conditions.
b.All exposed metal surfaces shall be polished clean and rigid of grease, dirt or other
foreign materials upon completion.
c.Upon completion, thoroughly clean all fixtures and accessories to leave the work in
polished condition.
1002.3.7 Inspection, Warranty Test and Disinfection
All pipes, fittings, traps, fixtures, appurtenances and equipment of the plumbing and
drainage system shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer to insure compliance with all
requirements of all Codes and Regulations referred to in this Specification.
1002.3.7.1Drainage System Test
a.The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings which can
be plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest stack
vent above the roof.
b.The system shall hold this water for a full 30 minutes during which time there shall
be no drop greater than 102 mm.
c.Where only a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the
same manner as described for the entire system except that a vertical stack 3.00 m highest
horizontal line to be tested may be installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure
or water pump may be used to supply the required pressure.
d.If and when the Engineer decides that an additional test is needed, such as an air to
smoke test on the drainage system, the Contractor shall perform such test without any additional
cost.
1002.3.7.2Water Test on System
a.Upon completion of the roughing-in and before connecting fixtures the entire cold
water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure 1 1/2 times the expected working
pressure in the system during operation and remained tight and leak-proofed.
b.Where piping system is to be concealed the piping system shall be separately in manner
similar to that described for the entire system and in the presence of the Engineer or his duly
designated representative.
1002.3.7.3 Defective Work
a. All defective materials replaced and tested will be repeated until satisfactory
performance is attained.
b.Any material replaced for the satisfactory performance of the system made shall be
at the expense of the Contractor.
c.Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be permitted.
1002.3.7.3Disinfection
a.The entire water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed and treated with
chlorine before it is operated for public use.
b.Disinfection materials shall be liquid chlorine or hypochlerite and shall be
introduced in a manner approved as practiced or approved by the Engineer into the water
distribution system.
c.After a contact period of not less than sixteen hours, the heavenly chlorinated water
shall be flushed from the system with potable water.
d.Valves for the water distribution system shall be opened and closed several times
during the 16 hours chlorination treatment is done.
1002.3.8 As-Built Drawings

Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit two sets of prints with all as-
built changes shown on the drawings in a neat workmanship manner. Such prints shall show
changes or actual installation and conditions of the plumbing system in comparison with the
original drawings.
The work done under this Item shall be quantified per length and/or number of units as
provided in the Bill of Quantities, tested and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The quantified items, installed in place shall be the basis for payment based from the unit
bid price for which prices and payments shall constitutefull compensation including labor,
materials and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment shall be made:
1002 (a) Cast Iron Soil Pipes and Fittings pieces/length
1002 (b) Galvanized Iron Pipes and Fittings pieces/length
1002(c) Plumbing Fixtures set
1002 (d) Roof Drain with Strainer set
ITEM 1003 - CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS
1003.1 Description
The work under this Item shall consist of furnishing all required materials, fabricated
woodwork, tools, equipment and labor and performing all operations necessary for the
satisfactory completion of all carpentry and joinery works in strict accord with applicable
drawings, details and these Specifications.
1003.2.1 Lumber
Lumber of the different species herein specified for the various parts of the structure shall
be well seasoned, sawn straight, sundried or kilndried and free from defects such as loose
unsound knots, pitch I~- pockets, sapwood, cracks and other imperfections impairing its strength,
durability and appearance.
1003.2.1.1Grades of Lumber and Usage
a.Stress grade is seasoned, close-grained and high quality lumber 1~ of the specified
specie free from defects and suitable for sustaining heavy loads.
Stress grade lumber shall be used for wooden structural members, subject to heavy
loads, and for sub-floor, framing embedded or in contact with concrete or masonry.
b.Select grade lumber of the specified specie is generally of high quality, of good
appearance, without imperfections, and suitable for use ff without waste due to defects and
suitable also for natural finish.
Select grade lumber shall be used for flooring; sidings, facia and it base boards, trims,
mouldings, millwork, railings, stairs, cabinet work, shelvings, doors, windows and frames of
openings.
c.Common grade lumber has minimum tight medium knot not larger, than 25 mm in
diameter, with minimal imperfections, without sapwood, without decay, insect holes, and
suitable for use with some waste due to minor defects and suitable also for paint finish.
Commongrade lumber shall be used for light framework for wall partitions, ceiling joist
and nailers.
1003.2.1.2 Lumber Species and Usage

Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, the following lumber species shall be used as
indicated:
a.Yacal (stress grade) for structural member such as post, girders, girts, sleepers door and
window frames set or in contact with concrete or masonry.
b.Guijo (select grade) for door and window frames set in wooden framework, for stairs,
for roof framing supporting ceramic or cement tiles, for floor joists and other wooden structural
parts.
c.Apitong (common grade) for roof framing supporting light roofing materials such as
galvanized iron, aluminum or asbestos sheets, for wall framing, ceiling joists, hangers and
nailers.
d.Tanguile (select grade) for doors and windows, facia and base boards, trims,
mouldings, millwork, railings, stairs, cabinet, work, shelvings, flooring and siding.
e.Narra (select grade) for stair railings, flooring boards, wall panels base boards, trims,
mouldings, cabinet work, millwork, doors and windows when indicated as such in the Plans.
f.Dao (select grade) for parts of the structure as enumerated under Section 1003.2.1.2 (e),
when indicated as such on the Plans.
1003.2.1.3 Moisture Content

Rough lumber for framing and siding boards shall be air-dried or sun-dried such that its
moisture content shall not exceed 22 percent.Dressed lumber for exterior and interior finishing,
for doors and windows, millwork, cabinet work and flooring boards shall be kiln-dried and shall
not have moisture content in excess of 14 percent at the time of installation in the structure.
1003.2.1.4 Substitution in Lumber Specie

Any lumber equally good for the purpose intended may be substituted for the specified
kind subject to the prior approval of the Engineer, provided the substitution shall be of an equal
or better specie acceptable to the Engineer. In case of substitution with better specie, no
additional cost therefore shall be allowed to the contractor.
1003.2.2 Plyboard
Plyboard shall be good grade and made of laminated wood strips of uniform width and
thickness bounded together with water resistant resin glue. The laminated core shall be finished
both faces with select grade tanguile or red lauan veneers not less than 2 mm thick similarly
bonded to the core. The plyboard of not less than 19 mm thick shall be free 'from defects such as
split in veneer, buckling or warping.
1003.2.3 Plywood
Plywood shall conform to the requirements of the Philippine Trade Standards 631-02.
Thickness of a single layer laminae shall not be less than 2 mm. The laminae shall be
superimposed in layers with grains crossing at right angles in successive layers to produce
stiffness. The face veneers shall be rotary cut from select grade timber. The laminae and face
veneers shall be bonded with water resistant resin glue, hot pressed and pressure treated.
Ordinary tanguile or red lauan plywood with good quality face veneers, 6 mm thick shall be used
for double walling and ceiling not exposed to moisture; waterproof or marine plywood shall be
used for ceiling exposed to moisture such as at toilets and eaves, and ceiling to be finished with
acrytex.
1003.2.4 Lawanit
Lawanit, when required per plans, shall be 6 mm thick, tempered or oil impregnated for
moisture/water resistance. Texture of lawanit shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1003.2.5 Materials Other Than Lumber
1003.2.5.1 Plastic Sheet

When required for counter top, plastic sheet such as Formica shall not be less than 1.50
mm thick and shall have hard, durable and glossy surface resistant to stain, abrasion and heat.
Color and design shall be as selected from the manufacturer's standard and approved by the
Engineer.
1003.2.5.2 Glue
Glue shall be from water resistant resins which, upon hardening, shall not dissolve nor
lose its bond or holding power even when soaked with water for extended period.
Glue in powder form be in sealed container and shall be without evidence of lumping or
deterioration in quality.
1003.2.5.3 Fasteners
Nails, screw, belts and straps shall be provided and used where suitable for fixing
carpentry and joinery works. All fasteners shall be brand new and of adequate size to ensure
rigidity of connections.
a.Nails of a,dequate size shall be steel wire, diamond-pointed, ribbed shank and bright
finish.
b.Screws of adequate size shall be cadnium or brass plated steel with slotted head.
c.Lag screws of adequate size, for anchoring heavy timber framing in concrete or
masonry, shall be galvanized steel.
d.Bolts and nuts shall be of steel having a yield point of no't less than 245 MPa. Bolts shall
have square heads and provided with standard flat steel washers and hexagonal nuts. Threads
shall conform to American coarse thread series. The threaded portion shall be long enough such
that the nut can be tightened against the bolted members without any need for blocking. The
bolt's threaded end shall be finished smooth for ease of engaging and turning of the nut.
e.Wrought iron straps or angles, when required in conjunction with bolts or lag screws to
provide proper anchorage, shall be of the shape and size shown on the Plans.
1003.3.1 Quality of Materials

All materials to be incorporated in the carpentry and joinery works shall be of the quality
specified under Section 2. Before incorporation in work, all materials shall have been
inspected/accepted by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
1003.3.2 Storage and Protection of Materials
Lumber and other materials shall be protected from dampness during and af1er delivery
at the site. Materials shall be delivered well in advance of actual need and in adequate quantity to
preclude delay in the work. Lumber shall be piled in orderly stack at least 150 mm above ground
and at sheltered place where it will be of least obstruction to the work.
1003.3.3 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings complete with essential dimensions and details of construction, as may be
required by the Engineer in connection with carpentry and joinery work, shall be submitted for
approval before proceeding with the work.
1003.3.4 Rough Carpentry

Rough carpentry covers timber structural framing for roof, flooring, siding, partition and
ceiling.
a.Framing shall be stress grade or common grade lumber of the specie specified under
Section.
b.Rough carpentry shall be done true to lines, levels and dimensions.It shall be squared,
aligned, plumbed and well fitted at joints.
c.Trusses and other roof framing shall be assembled, fitted and set to exact location and
slope indicated on the Plans.
d.Fasteners, connectors and anchors of appropriate type and number shall be provided
and fitted where necessary.
e.Structural members shall not be cut, bored or notched for the passage of conduits or
pipes without prior approval of the Engineer. Members damaged by such cutting or boring shall
be reinforced by means of specifically formed and approved steel plates or shapes, otherwise,
damaged structural members shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
f.Timber framing in contact with concrete or masonry shall be treated with termite-
proofing solution and after drying coated with bituminous paint.
1003.3.5 Finished Carpentry

Finished carpentry covers works on flooring, siding and ceiling boards, stairs, cabinets,
fabricated woodwork, millwork and trims.
a.Framing lumber shall be select grade, free from defects and where exposed in
finished work, shall be selected for color and grain.
b.Joints of framing shall be tenoned, mortised or doweled where suitable, closely
fitted and secured with water resistant resins glue. Exterior joints shall be mitered and interior
angles coped.
c.Panels shall be fitted allow for contraction or expansion and insure that the panels
remain in place without warping, splitting and opening of joints.
d.Plyboard shall be as specified under Section 1003.2.3 unless otherwise indicated on
the Plans.
e.Plywood shall be specified under Section 1003.2.4.
f.Exposed edges of plywood or plywood for cabinets shall be provided with select
grade hardwood strips, rabbetted as necessary, glued in place and secured with finishing nails.
To prevent splitting, hardwood for trims shall be drilled before fastening with nails or screws.
g.Fabricated woodwork shall be done preferably at the shop. It shall be done true to
details and profiles indicated on the Plans.
Where set against concrete or masonry, woodwork shall be installed when curing is
completed.
h. Exposed wood surfaces shall be free from disfiguring defects such as raised grains,
stains, uneven planning, sanding, tool marks and scratches.
Exposed surfaces shall be machine or hand sanded to an even smooth surface, ready for
finish.
ITEM 1004 - HARDWARE
1004.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing all building hardware required to: (1)
ensure rigidity of joints/connections of the different parts of the structure; and (2) equip in a
satisfactory operating condition parts of the structure such as doors, windows, cabinets, lockers,
drawers and other similar operating parts as indicated on the plans and in accordance with this
specifications.
1004.2.1 Rough Hardware

All rough hardware such as nails, screws, lag screws, bolts and other related fasteners
required for carpentry work shall be first class quality and locally available.
1004.2.2 Finishing Hardware

All finishing hardware consisting of locksets, latches, bolts and other devices, door
closers, knobs, handles, hinges and other similar hardware shall be first class quality available
locally and conforming with the following specifications.
1004.2.2.1 Door Locksets

Door locks appropriate for particular functions shall be of durable construction,
preferably the product of single reputable manufacturer for consistent quality and master
keying.
1004.2.2.1.1 Cylindrical lockset for swing wood door shall of sturdy construction and knob
design. The cylindrical case shall be made of steel, zinc coated & dichromate dip. The knobs,
latch, strike· & pin tumbler assembly shall be cast brass or bronze. The spring and spindle shall
be steel, zinc coated. The pins and the key, shall be nickel-silver. The latch, with a minimum
throw of 16mm, shall be retracted by knob from either side except when the outside knob is
locked by key in the outside knob or by the turn push button on the inside knob.
1004.2.2.1.2 Mortise lock for swing door shall have cast bronze latch bolt with steel
compression spring, cast bronze dead bolt with hardened steel inserts, wrought bronze or brass
knobs heavy gauge and cold formed steel operation levers. The pin tumbler cylindrical
assembly shall be cast bronze or brass and fitted with 5 spring pressed nickel silver pins.
Mortise lock used in conjunction with fire exit bolts shall have armored fronts.
1004.2.2.1.3 Unit of monolock for swing door shall be factory assembled in one piece, with
knobs and escutcheons attached, ready for installation.
All parts of unit lock shall be non-ferrous metal. Frame shall be one piece cast bronze or
extruded brass, front shall be flat for door 35 mm thick and bevelled for door 45 mm thick, and
latch bolt shall be pivoted swing type with minimum 26 mm throw. Cylinder shall be extruded
brass with 5 spring-pressed pins and keys shall be nickel silver.
1004.2.2.1.4 Dead lock for sliding door shall be mortise or surface mounted type to suit
particular application.
1004.2.2.1.4.1 Mortise type dead lock shall have cast bronze case, front, latch bolts, strike
and cylinder. Operation of dead bolt shall be by drop handles from either side. When locked
by key from outside, or by thumb knob from inside, drop handle will not operate the dead
bolt.
1004.2.2.1.4.2 Surface type deadlock shall have cast bronze case, strike and cylinder.
Interlocking vertical bolt shall be hardened steel operated by key from outside and thumb
turn from inside. Strike shall the angle type. I
1004.2.2.1.5 Deadlock for swinging door shall be tubular design with mechanism made of
heavy gauge cold-rolled steel, zinc coated and dischromated. Dead bolt, strike and pin tumbler
cylinder shall be bronze.Dead bolt, with at least 25 mm throw, shall be operated by key from
outside and by thumb from inside.
1004.2.2.1.6 Lock for door of emergency/fire exit (panic hardware) shall be cast bronze 'or
brass and heavy duty locking device coupled with ahorizontal crossbar. Latch shall be operated
by key from outside and by crossbar from inside. Locking device shall be surface or mortise
type suitable for a particular application. Inactive leaf of double doors or emergency/fire exit
shall be fitted with vertical rod actuated by crossbars, such vertical rod providing two point
locking, bottom and overhead.
1004.2.2.1.7 Lock for drawers and cabinets shall be bronze or brass with latch operated by key
through a pin-tumbler cylinder 22 mm in diameter. Back plate of the lock shall be provided
with four screw holes for mounting.
1004.2.2.1.8 Hasplock, when required as indicated on the Plans shall be hinge hasp with
integral padlock. The hinge hasp shall be zinc coated wrought steel, 47.5 mm in width and 100
mm in length when closed. The integral padlock shall be pin tumbler type with solid or
laminated zinccoated wrought steel case with hardened steel shackle securely attached to the
draw bolt.
1004.2.2.2 Door Closers
a. All door closer shall be cast bronze provided with a key valve or cap valve for making
necessary adjustment.
b. The following table shall serve as guide in determining door closer sizes:
Door Maximum Width Size of Closer

0.76 m Size 2
0.90 m Size 3
1.07 m Size 4
1.20 m Size 5
1.37 m Size 6
Use larger size where unusual conditions exist.
1004.2.2.3 Hinge
Hinge unless otherwise indicated on the Plans shall be brass coated wrought iron steel for
interior doors and wrought bronze for exterior doors with non-rising loose steel pins with button
tips and mounting screws of the same materials.
1004.2.2.4 Sliding Door Hardware

Sliding door hardware shall be four-wheel ball bearing trolley on overhead track. Track is
of rolled steel formed steel or extruded aluminum.
Bearing is of plain steel balls or steel rollers. Wheels to be steel, brass, rubber or plastic as the
case maybe.
1004.2.2.5 Miscellaneous Hardwares
1004.2.2.5.1 Flush Bolt

Flush/extension flush type bolt shall be made of stainless steel with proper length suitable
to the door specified.
1004.2.2.5.2 Barrel bolts shall be of wrought steel brass coated with an attachment of at least
4-screws.
1004.2.2.5.3 Door Pull and Push Plate
Door pull and push plate shall be made of stainless steel with concealed attachments.
1004.2.2.5.4 Hook, Bumper and Silencer
Hook, bumper and silencer shall be made of extruded brass or bronze, dull chrome
finish with at least 2 screw attachments.
1004.2.2.5.5 Furniture’s and Cabinets Hardware
Furniture and cabinet hardware line piano hinge, invisible hinge, floor pivot hinge,
cabinet door catches, shall be made from extruded brass or bronze with dull chrome finish, of
sizes and type suited for use.
1004.2.2.5.6 Push Plate
Push plate for metal door shall be made of stainless steel with concealed attachments.
1004.3.1 Submittals:
The Contractor shall submit all necessary information to the Engineer prior to placing of
order.
1004.3.1.1 Manufacturers data such as catalog for every hardware item to be furnished,
showing all finishes, sizes, catalog numbers and pictures, with all abbreviations fully
explained shall be submitted as general information and reference.
1004.3.1.2 Hardware templates for fabricated doors and windows shall be furnished to each
fabricator to confirm that adequate provision will be done for proper installation of the
hardware.
1004.3.1.3 Operation and maintenance data shall be provided and submitted to the
Owner/DPWH showing all the hardware component part lists and maintenance instructions
for each type supplied including the necessary wrenches of tools required.
1004.3.2 Packaging and Marking I
1004.3.2.1 Each article shall be individually packaged in the manufacturerscommercial

carton/container' properly marked or labeled so as to be t readily identified and delivered to
the project site in the original I manufacturers container/package. .
1004.3.2.2 All hardware shall be provided with fasteners necessary for the installation packed
in the same container with the Hardware.
1004.3.3 Storage and Protection
Hardware shall be properly stored in a dry and secured place. It shall be protected from
damage at all times prior to and after installation.
1004.3.4Installation of Hardware
a.All hardware shall be installed in a neat workmanship manner following the

manufacturers’ instruction manual to fit details as indicated on the Plans.
b.Except as indicated or specified otherwise, fasteners furnished with the hardware shall
be used to fasten hardware in place.
c.After installation works are completed the hardware shall be protected from paints,
stains, blemishes and other damage until the work are properly turned over and accepted.
d.All hardware shall be properly checked and adjusted in the presence of the engineer and
all hinges, locks, catches, bolts, pulls, closers and other miscellaneous items shall operate
properly.
e.After hardware are properly checked and adjusted keys shall be properly identified with
key tags and turned over to the Engineer.
1004.3.5 Keying
Locks shall be keyed in sets and subsets. Where locks are required by the owner to be
keyed alike in one system furnish a total of 4 keys for each set.

All hardware actually installed shall be measured and determined by number of pieces or
units ready for service as provided in the Bill of Quantities accepted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

The Items measured and determined as provided in subsection 1004.4 shall be paid for at
the unit bid price which payment constitute full compensation of materials, labor and incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
1004.2.1 Rough Hardware pcs/kilo

1004.2.2 Finishing Hardware pcs/set
ITEM 1005 - STEEL WINDOWS
1005.1 Description
This Item shall consist of all fabricated steel windows fully equipped with fixing
accessories and locking devices as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.

All members shall be of hot-rolled, low carbon, new billet steel, heavy section with depth
of at least 33mm and web thickness of at least 3mm. Frame members shall be of equal leg design
section only at points where called for or shown on detailed drawings. Continuous angle fins, as
indicated shall be furnished. Zee type section of special design with offset permitting down
turned leg of the ventilator member to seat flush when ventilator is in a fully closed position,
shall be used for frame at sills.Ventilator members shall be special angle shape. Frames of
ventilator members shall have integral weather baffles providing double flat parallel weathering
contacts of not less than 6mm width on all four sides of the ventilator. Muntins shall be 25mm by
25mm rolled-tee sections. All members to be used shall conform to the specification
requirements of ASTM A "505. The frame member shall afford not less than 16mm continuous
anchorage to surrounding masonry. Unless otherwise specified/or indicated on Plan as residential
casement, special size of section shall be used.
1005.2.1 Residential Casement

Sections shall be hot rolled new billet steel special design. Frame and ventilator members
shall be specially designed zee sections, not less than 25 mm in depth and not less than 3 mm in
thickness, with weathering baffles rolled integrally to provide continuous double contact between
frame and casement ventilator members. Muntins shall be 19mm by 19 mm rolled tee-sections.
Side hung hinges shall be of extension friction type welded to both frame and ventilator with
friction washers and steel acorn-nuts.
1005.2.2 Heavy Duty Side-hinged Ventilator
Frame and ventilator members shall be specially designed zee section not less than 33
mm in depth and not less than 3 mm in thickness, with weathering baffles rolled integrally to
provide continuous double contact between frame and side-hinged ventilator members. Muntin
shall be 25 mm by 25 mm rolled tee-sections. Simplex-type hinges shall be of extension friction
type with bronze friction washers and rust proofed steel acorn-nuts., hinged design shall provide
ferrous to non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hinges shall be welded to both
frame and ventilator.
1005.2.3 Projected Ventilators

All members shall be hot rolled new billet steel window. Frames and ventilator sections
shall be special angle shape and not less than 33 mm deep from front to back not less than 3 mm
in thickness.Weathering projections, overlapping, parallel contacts at both insides and outside
points of closure on all four sides of the ventilator shall be 6 mm.
1005.2.4 Awning ventilators (for series of ventilators operating simultaneously)

Frame, ventilator and muntin members shall be hot rolled new billet steel section not less
than 33 mm deep, specifically designed for steel windows.
1005.3.1 Fabrication and Welds

Corners of frame and ventilator shall be mitered and electrically butt welded with
exposed welds ground smooth. Head drips shall be provided where ventilator extend to the top of
the windows. Muntins shall be welded to frames. Muntin intersections shall be welded with flush
interior surfaces.
1005.3.2 Hardware (fixing accessories and locking devices)
1005.3.2.1 Residential Casement, heavy duty side-hinged ventilator
a. Roto Type: Each ventilator shall be hung on two heavy hot rolled steel of the extension
type, welded to both frame and ventilator. Hinged design shall provide ferrous to non ferrous to
non ferrous contacts between all movable surfaces. Hardware shall control ventilator
independently of the screen and shall consist of a polished bronze locking handle and worn drive
operator. Provide however that roto hardware shall not be used on any ventilator, the size of
which exceeds 1 square meter in area. Ventilators over 150 mm in height shall have three (3)
hinges and double locking device.
b. Simplex-Type: Hinges shall be of extension friction type with bronze friction washers
and rust proofed steel acorn-nuts. Hinged design shall provide ferrous to non ferrous contacts
between all movable surfaces. Hinges shall be welded to both frame and ventilator.
c. Polished bronze locking handle and strike shall be furnished for ventilator 500 mm and
under in height, two point locking devices and three (3) hinges for ventilators over 500 mm in
height. Sill adjuster shall be provided for ventilator over 1000 mm square meter in area.
1005.3.2.2 Projected Ventilators

Each ventilator shall be balanced on two heavy steel arms riveted to ventilator -and
frame. Rivet holes in arms shall be bronze bushed.Uniform tension to hold ventilator in open
position shall be obtained by two heavy bronze, sliding friction shoes with adjustable
compression springs enclosed in bronze housing attached to the ventilator top rail member. The
window frame member shall act as a guide for the friction shoe. Hardware shall consist of
polished bronze pole hook ring, cam handle and strike for outward projecting ventilators.
Polished bronze, pole operated spring latches, shall be substituted for locking handles on
outward projecting ventilator, out of each floor, polished bronze, cordoperated, spring latches for
inward projecting vents not within reach of floor provided with double line of best quality sash
cord 5 mm to 6 mm in diameter extending to 762 mm above floor. Polished bronze, under screen
push bar working through the member to be furnished for outward projecting ventilator when so
indicated on Plans or drawings.
1005.3.2.3 Awning Ventilators

Each awning window so indicated on the Plans shall be of the awning type window in
which the ventilators operate simultaneously and controlled manually. Each projecting ventilator
shall be balanced on two heavy steel supporting arms. Arms for upper ventilators shall have tops
pivots enclosed in malleable iron housing riveted to ventilator and pivoting point shall be located
outside of window to provide efficient leverage. Ventilator in each window shall be equipped
with extension arms attached to connecting steel frame and shall be concealed within frame
when ventilators are in closed position. All ventilators shall open or close simultaneously. The
bottom ventilator shall be the means of control and shall be fitted with a solid bronze, polished,
cam locking handle and strike. Base of handle to dowel with strike to prevent side motion of
ventilator. Where windows are screened, provide a bronze under screen push bar working thru
the frame member.
1005.3.3 Installation
All steel windows shall be set plumb and true in openings. The joints between the
window frame and masonry shall be carefully caulked. Contacts between windows or doors and
adjacent steel including mullions shall be sealed with mastic furnished and applied by the
Contractor. Windows shall be designed for glazing from the outside with spring wire glazing
clips and glazing putty.
Mullions and anchors shall be manufacturer's standard, vertical mullions, anchors and
bolts for attaching shall be furnished where required.
Adequate anchorage shall be provided to ensure firm installation.
1005.3.4 Shop Painting

All windows shall be given a coating of gray metallic paint applied to all surfaces as paint
base for prevention of corrosion. Prior to application of paint primer the steel sections shall be
cleaned of rust, oil, grease and other foreign matter.

Steel windows shall be measured by actual in place installed with respective design/style
and type of operation in square meters.

The actual area in square meters of steel windows satisfactorily installed and ready for
service shall be the basis for payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
1005 (a) Residential Casement square meters

1005(b) Heavy Duty Side-hinged Ventilator square meters
1005 (c) Projected Ventilator square meters
1005 (d) Awing ventilator square meters
ITEM 1006 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1006.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing all fabricated steel doors and frames
equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices in accordance with the Plans and/or shop
drawings and as herein specified.

All door cladding plates or panels shall be formed from gauge 20 cold-rolled, prime
quality steel. Frames shall be formed from gauge 16 cold-rolled steel. The materials used shall
conform to the specification requirement of ASTM-A505.
1006.2.1 Tubular Door (Casement/Sliding)
a. Hollow steel doors shall be custom built of size and details as indicated on the Plans
and/or shop drawings. Cladding of doors shall be flush or louver type. Doors shall be 44 mm
thick, side hinged or overhead· hung, as called for on the Plans.
b. Flush doors shall be constructed from two outer steel sheets not lighter than gauge 20,
with edges welded and finished flush. The outer face sheets shall be reinforced with gauge 24
vertical channels or interlocking zee members. Sound insulation fillers of cork fiberboard,
mineral wool board or asbestos shall be placed full height in spaces between reinforcing
channels. Doors shall have smooth, flush surfaces without any visible joints or seams on exposed
faces or stile edges except around glazed or louvered pane inserts. Top and bottom frame of
doors shall have continuous reinforcing channels welded to face sheets.The channel for exterior
doors shall be inverted type, not lighter than gauge 16, constructed to form a weather seal.
Glazed opening shall be provided where indicated and molding around glazed openings shall not
be lighter than gauge 20 metal.
1006.2.2 Grille doors shall be of flat, square or round bars (wrought iron) as indicated on the
Plans framed on galvanized black iron pipe or flat wrought iron bars, of the design shown on the
Plans.
1006.2.3 Tubular steel frames shall be machine pressed true to details, to size and shape as
shown on the Plans and shall have full welded unit or knockdown field assembled type
construction at corners and other joints.
1006.2.4 Steel Louvers

Louvers shall be machine pressed conforming to the size and design indicated on the
Plans with removable louver pane formed to fit the metal sub frame of openings. The steel sheets
shall meet the requirement of ASTM 505, rivets of ASTM B 316, screws, bolts, nuts and washers
of ASTM B 211.
1006.2.5 Anchors and Fasteners

Anchors shall be steel, zinc coated or coated or painted with rust inhibitive paint, of sizes,
shapes and design per manufacturer's standards.
Floor anchors shall not be lighter than gauge 18, with exception of jamb anchors for installing
door frames in metal latch and plaster assemblies which shall be minimum of gauge 16 and shall
not extend no more than 20 mm out of the back of the jamb.
1006.3.1 Fabrication
Corner joints of frames shall be mitered and welded conforming to manufacturer's
standard manual for metal doors. All contact edges be closed tight. Welds on exposed surface
shall be ground smooth and shall be neat in appearance.
Joints for knock-down type frame corners shall be designed for simple field assembly of
header to jamb members by concealed tenon, splice plates, or other type concealed in
interlocking joint that will produce square and rigid corners. Joints shall be securely locked in
place during erection and the alignment of adjoining members shall be maintained. All bolted
connections shall be provided with lock units.
1006.3.2 Shop Finish
a. Hot or Cold Phosphate Surface Treatment

All steel doors, frames and louvers shall be cleaned thoroughly, phosphate-treated to
assure maximum paint adherence and prime finish, in accordance with the following operations:
1. After fabrication, grease and dirt shall be removed by a hot alkali solution and rinsed
with hot water.
2. After cleaning, all parts shall be immersed in hot or cold phosphate solution and rinsed
with a diluted solution or chronic acid.
3. After drying under controlled temperature, one coat of shop primer shall be applied by
dipping type especially developed for materials treated with phosphates.
The cleaning, phosphate, dipping or spraying of shop primer and even drying shall be
done on a continuous operation in the factory.
Steel doors, frames and louvers shall be set plumb and true in 'The joint between frame
and masonry shall be carefully contacts between door/frame and adjacent steel shall be sealed
with mastic.
1006.3.4 Wall Anchors

A minimum of three anchors shall be provided for each jamb. Anchors shall be located
opposite the top and bottom hinges and midway between top and bottom anchors.
Anchors for fastening frames to masonry shall be adjustable, and perforated and shall
extend not less than 200 mm into masonry.
Anchors for fastening frames to metal or wood stud partitions shall be welded to metal or
nailed to wood studs respectively.
Anchors for fastening frames to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be secured to
existing construction with expansion bolts. Frames shall be fastened securely with anchors.
Anchors for fastening frames to partitions of plaster on metal lathe shall be secured
firmly to back of frames that shall receive the latch. Adjustable strut anchors shall be provided
on each side of frame for fastening to the structural members of the partition and of the ceiling
framing above. The size and type of strut anchors shall be as recommended by the metal door
manufacturer.
1006.3.5 Floor Anchors

Floor anchors shall be provided at the bottom of each jamb member, anchorsshall be
fixed/adjustable and drilled for 10mm diameter anchor bolts.
Where floor fill occurs, the bottom of frames shall terminate at the indicatedfinished floor
levels and shall be supported by adjustable extensionclips resting on and anchored to the
structural slab.
1006.3.6 Hardware
Sidebronze butts for side hung doors, overhead pocket hardware for trackand roller types
and locksets shall be suitable for the service required and subject to the approval of the Engineer
and as provided in Item 1004, Hardware.

Steeldoors, frames, louvers, accessories and hardware shall be measured in square
meters/per set as shown on the Plans. A set shall consist of metal door, jambs, anchors and
hardware except locksets.

The area in m2 for every hollow steel door, flush door, grille door and steel louver
installed ready for service shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit
price
Payment will be made under:
1006 (a) Hollow Steel Door m2/set

1006 (b) Flush Door m2/set
1006 (c) Grille Door m2/set
1006 (d) Steel Louver Door m2/set
ITEM 1007 - ALUMINUM GLASS DOORS
1007.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass door materials, labor, tools and
equipment required in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in
accordance with this Specification.
1007.2.1 Frame and panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum sections true to
details with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and free from defects impairing strength or
durability. Extruded aluminum sections shall conform to the specification requirements as
defined in ASTM B 211.
1007.2.2 Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be
made of non-corrosive materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, etc.
1007.2.3 Hardware for fixing and locking devices shall be closely matched to the extruded
aluminum section and adaptable to the type and method of opening.
1007.2.4 Vinyl weather strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal
and without adverse deformation when installed.
1007.2.5 Pile weather strip shall be silicon treated and free from residual wetting agents and
made of soft fine hair as on wool, fur, etc.
1007.2.6 Glazing shall conform to the requirement specified in Item 1012 - Glass and Glazing.

For all assembly and fabrication works the cut ends shall be true and accurately jointed,
free of burrs and rough edges. Cut-out recesses, mortising, grinding operation for hardware shall
be accurately made and properly reinforced when necessary.
1007.3.1 Installation Procedure
1007.3.1.1 Main frame shall consist of head sill and jamb stiles specifically designed and
machined to interfit and are joined at corners with self threading screws.
1007.3.1.2 Frame sill shall be stepped and sloped with offset weep holes for efficient drainage to
the exterior.
1007.3.1.3 Door panel shall be accurately joined at corners assembled and fixed rigidly to ensure
weather tightness.
1007.3.1.4 Aluminum glass door and main frame shall be installed in a prepared opening to be
set plumb, square. Level and true to details.
1007.3.1.5 All joints between metal surface and masonry shall be fully caulked to ensure weather
tightness.
1007.3.1.6 Sliding type door panel shall be equipped with concealed roller overhead tracks with
bottom guide.
1007.3.1.7 Double action type door panel shall be ~quipped with heavy duty hinges that will
control the door leaf in a close or open position.
1007.3.1.8 Weather-strip shall be furnished on edges at the meeting stiles of doors.
1007.3.1.9 Where aluminum is to be in contact with steel concrete cinder, block, tile, plaster or
other similar masonry construction the aluminum surface shall be back pain-ted before erection
with a bituminous paint.
1007.3.2 Shop Finish E

Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be electro type hard coats.
1007.3.3 Protection
a. All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damaged during
transit and construction operations.
b. Aluminum parts in contact with steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat of
zinc chromate primer applied to the steel or by application of bituminous paint.
1007.3.4 Cleaning
a. The Contractor does not only protect all entrance units during construction but also
responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning aluminum surfaces.
b. Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned with plain water with kerosene or gasoline and
then wipe surfaces using clean cotton fabric. No abrasive cleaning agents shall be permitted.

Aluminum glass door, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall be
measured in square meters base on actual in place installed as shown on the Plans accepted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

The area in square meters of aluminum glass doors installed including main frame and
ready for service as provided in Item 1007.4 shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid
or contract unit price.
1007 Aluminum glass door m2

sliding type, designated as
D - on the schedule
ITEM 1008 - ALUMINUM GLASS WINDOWS
1008.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all aluminum glass window materials, labor, tools
and equipment required in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and in
1008.2.1 Frame and panel members shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum section true to
details with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and free from defects impairing strength or
durability. Extruded aluminum section shall conform to the specification requirements defined in
ASTM B 211.
1008.2.2 Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rrivets and other miscellaneous fastening devices shall be
made of non-corrosive materials such as aluminum, stainless steel, etc.
1008.2.3 Hardware for fixing and locking device shall be closely matched to the extruded
aluminum section and adaptable to the type and method of opening.
1008.2.4 Weather-strip shall be first class quality flexible vinyl forming an effective seal and
without adverse deformation when installed.
1008.2.5 Glazing shall conform to the requirements specified in Item 1012.
1008.2.6 Pile weatherstrip shall be silicon treated and free from residual wetting agents made of
soft fine hair as on wool, fur, etc.

For all assembly and fabrication works the cut end shall be: true and accurate, free of
burrs and rough edges. Cut-outs recesses, mortising and grinding operation for hardware shall be
accurately made and properly reinforced.
1008.3.1.1 Main frame shall consist of head, sill and jamb.
1008.3.1.2 Window sash
1008.3.1.3 Window panel shall be jointed at corners with miter and fixed rigidly to ensure
weather tightness.
1008.3.1.4 Sliding windows shall be provided with nylon sheave. Sliding panels shall be
suspended with concealed roller overhead tracks with bottom guide pitch outward and slotted for
complete drainage. The sliding panels shall be provided with interior handles. The locking
device shall be a spring loaded extruded latch that automatically engage~ special frame hips.
1008.3.1.5 Casement window type shall be provided with two hinges fabricated from extruded
aluminum alloy. They shall open on stay arms having adjustable sliding friction shoes to control
window panel operations. Locking device shall be one arm action handle for manual operations
complete with strike plate.
1008.3.1.6 All joints between metal surface and masonry shall be fully caulked.
1008.3.1.7 Aluminum parts in contact with steel members shall be properly insulated by a coat of
zinc chromate, primer/bituminous paint applied to the steel surface.
1008.3.1.8 Weatherstrip shall be furnished on edges at the meeting stiles.
1008.3.2 Shop Finish

Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be electrotype hard coats such as anodize, satin, etc.
1008.3.3 Protection
All aluminum parts shall be protected adequately to ensure against damage during transit
and construction phase.
1008.3.4 Cleaning
1008.3.4.1 The contractor does not only protect all entrance units during the construction phase
but shall also be responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning the aluminum
surface including glazing before work is accepted by the Engineer.
1008.3.4.2 Aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned with kerosene or gasoline diluted with water
and then wipes surface using clean cloth rugs.
1008.3.4.3 No abrasive cleaning materials shall be permitted in cleaning surface.

Aluminum glass window fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall
be measured in square meters actually installed in place and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

The area of aluminum glass windows in square meters ready for service as provided in
the Bill of Quantities shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price
which price and payment constitute all materials, labor including incidentals.
1008(1) Aluminum Sliding Windows m2

1008(2) Aluminum Casement Windows m2
ITEM 1009 - JALOUSIE WINDOWS
1009.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all jalousie window materials, labor, tools and
equipment required as shown on the Plans and undertaking the proper installation in accordance
with this Specification.
1009.2.1 Jalousie metal frame shall be made of extruded aluminum section true to details
conforming to the specifications requirements defined in ASTM B 211. .
1009.2.2 Glass slats shall be 5.6 mm thick clear view of 100 mm wide smooth edge glass.
1009.2.3 Wood slats shall be fabricated from kiln-dried tanguile with provision of interlocking
grooves to prevent penetration of rain water.
1009.2.4 Insert screens shall be aluminum cloth and installed as insert overlap type.
1009.2.5 Wrought iron grilles shall be manufactured from 12 mm square bars or round bars
conforming to the shop drawing submitted and approved by the Engineer.
1009.2.6 Wood jalousie window assembly shall be fabricated of kiln dried wood boards
consisting of the following members:
a. Vertical operating mechanism shall be of paired zigzag cut member one fixed to the
wood jambs.
b. Slats/blades are made with interlocking grooves. It shall be of kiln-dried tanguile 15.8
mm thick by 100 mm wide.
c. Lever handles are made of wrought iron flat bars that should lock the unit in closed
position.
1009.2.7 Wood jambs shall be fabricated from well seasoned wood specie conforming to Item
1003, Carpentry and Joinery requirements.
1009.3.1 All window frames shall be in place and rigidly anchored in a prepared opening before
any installation work is commenced.
1009.3.2 Window openings shall fit commercial height of the vertical operating
mechanism/jalousie metal frames to avoid cutting of members.
1009.3.3 Installation Procedures
1009.3.3.1 Glass Jalousie Windows

a. Jalousie metal frames shall be temporarily fixed at bottom and top ends using wood
screw.
b.Place glass slats into the slat clips starting below until the whole units are entirely
glazed.
c. Operate units and make adjustment where required taking, into consideration that all
units are properly aligned and satisfactory operational.
d. Close the slats clips in a manner that the glass slats are securely fixed them
permanently fix all units with wood screws.
1009.3.3.2 Wood Jalousie Windows
a. Fit each unit into the prepared window opening and temporarily fix with nails at
bottom and top ends of vertical operating mechanism.
b. Operate units and make adjustments where required.
c. Fix all units permanently and properly align each unit.

All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters or number of
units installed complete with glass, wood slats and ready for service.

The completed work, measured in accordance with Sub-section 1009.4 and accepted by
the Engineer, shall be the basis for payments which price and payment constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials fabricated wood products, tools, equipment, labor and
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1009(1) Glass Jalousie Windows m2

1009(2) Wood Jalousie Windows m2
ITEM 1010 - WOODEN DOORS AND WINDOWS
1010.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, hardware, plant, tools, labor and
services necessary for complete fabrication and installation of wooden doors and windows of the
type and size as shown I on the Plans and in accordance with the following specifications and I
applicable specifications under Item 1003 on Carpentry and Joinery I Works.
1010.2.1 Lumber
Lumber of doors, windows and jambs, and panels when required, shall be kiln-dried with
moisture content of not more than 14% and shall be of the specie indicated on the Plans and/or
specified under Item 1003 on Carpentry and Joinery Works.
1010.2.2 Plywood.
Plywood for veneer of solid core and hollow core flush doors shall be 3-ply, rotary cut,
6mm thick ordinary plywood, Class B grade. Marine or waterproof plywood, rotary cut, 3-ply, 6
mm thick shall be used for flush doors at toilets and bathrooms or at places where these are
exposed to moisture.
1010.2.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be water resistant resins and shall be non-staining.
1010.2.4 Glass
Glass for window panes shall be 3 mm thick, smoked or Industry type unless otherwise
shown on the Plans or indicated in the Schedule of Doors and Windows.
1010.2.5 Capiz Shells

Capiz shells, when required for window sashes, shall be of selected quality, free from dirt
or blemishes and shall be large enough to obtain flat square piece.
1010.2.6 Hardware
Hardware shall be as specified under Item 1004 on Building Hardware.
1010.3.1 Fabrication
Wooden doors and windows, including frames, shall be fabricated in accordance with the
designs' and sizes shown on the Plans. The fabricated products shall be finished square, smoothly
sanded and free from damage or war page.
a. Flush Type Hollow Core Doors
Flush type hollow core doors shall be adequately framed with stiles and top and bottom
rails having a minimum thickness of 44 mm and width of 75 mm. Two intermediate rails at least
44 mm wide shall be provided for stiffness.
The stiles and the top and bottom rails shall be rebutted at least 10 mm wide to receive
the 6 mm thick plywood veneer. A lock block shall be' provided at each stile, long enough to
connect to the two intermediate rails and at least 75 mm wide for mounting the lockset.
The plywood veneer shall be glued and nailed to the framing with 25 mm long finishing
nails space at not more than 150 mm on centers.
b. Flush Type Solid Core Doors
Flush type solid core doors shall be fabricated in the same manner as the hollow core type
except that spaces between stiles and r3i1s shall be filled and fitted with wood blocks of the
same specie and of uniform thickness thinner by about the thickness of the plywood veneers. The
filler blocks shall be secured to either stiles or rails by nails. Stiles and rails of flush type doors
shall be joined by means of blind mortise and tenon joint, tightly fitted, glued and locked with
bamboo pin 5 mm round.
c. Panel doors
Stiles and rails of panel doors shall have a minimum thickness of 44 mm and width of
140 mm.
Rails minimum thickness of 44 mm and width of 140 mm. Rails shall be framed to stiles
by mortise and tenon joints. Rabbets or grooves of stiles by mortise and tenon joints. Rabbets or
grooves of stiles and rails to receive panels shall be 6.5 mm wide and 20 mm deep. Integral
moldings formed on both faces of stiles and rails framing the panels shall be true to shape and
well defined. Intersections of moldings shall be mitered and closely fitted.
Panels of the same specie and having a minimum thickness of 20 mm shall be beveled
around its edges up to a minimum width of 50 mm, both faces. The beveled edges shall closely
fit into the grooves of stiles ',"j and rails, but free to move to prevent splitting when shrinkage
occurs.
d. Window Sashes with Glass Panes or Wood Panels
Window sashes shall be fabricated in conformity with the design, .1 size and type of
installation shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, stiles and rails shall be
Tanguile with minimum I thickness of 30 mm and width of 70 mm. Jointing of stiles and rails
shall I be mortise and tenon secured with glue and bamboo pin. Stiles and rails shall rebut at the
exterior face for mounting glass panes or wood I panels. Integral moldings formed as frames for
panes or panels shall be true to shape, sharply defined and mitered at joints. Separate moldings,
Of the same design shall be provided for fixing glass panes and wood panel from the outside.
e. Window Sashes with Capiz Shells
Stiles and rails shall be of the same sizes specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) and
assembled with mortise and tenon joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, lattices for
framing capiz shall be tanguile, 8 mm thick and 15 mm wide, spaced at not more than 60 mm on
centers both ways. Grooves 2 mm wide and 5 mm shall be made at sides of lattices to receive the
preformed capiz shells.
The lattices shall be assembled with half lap joints at their intersections and the
assembled lattices containing the capiz shells shall be framed into the stiles and rails.
Selected capiz shells shall be washed to remove dirt and blemishes and drier under the
sun for bleaching effect. Capiz shells shall be cut square to required sizes with sharp bench cutter
to produce non-serrated and non-peeling edges.
f. Sliding Type Window Sashes
Stiles of sliding type window sashes shall be framed to the top and bottom rails with
mortise and tenon joints. Tenons shall be formed on the stiles. Joints shall be tightly fitted, glued
and locked with bamboo pins. Top and bottom rails shall be 10 mm wider than the stiles. Top
rails shall be rabbeted to form tongue flush with the outer face, with width of 8 mm and height of
10 mm. The stiles and rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) to receive glass
panes or wood panels.
g. Awning Type Window Sashes
Tenons of rails shall be fitted into the mortises formed on the stiles and the joints glued
and locked. The stiles and rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item 1010.3.1 (d) for
mounting of glass panes. Series of sashes to be installed vertically shall have their meeting rails
rabbeted for half lapping when in closed position.
h. Casement Type Window Sashes
Rails of casement type window sashes shall be fitted to stiles with mortise and tenon
joint. Tenons shall be formed in the rails. Meeting rails shall be rabbeted to provide for half
lapping when in closed position. The stiles and rails shall be rabbeted as specified under Item
1010.3.1 (d) for mounting of glass panes or wood panels.
i. Door and Window Frames
Framing of the specie(s) specified under Item 1003 shall be fabricated in conformity with
the profile and sizes shown on the Plans. Frames shall be assembled with tightly fitted tongue
and groove joint mitered at both sides, and nailed. The assembled frames shall be finished square
and flat on the same plane. Assembled frames shall be braced temporarily to prevent their
distortion during delivery to the site and installation.
1010.3.2Installation
a.Frames shall be set plumb and square in concrete/masonry work or framework of walls
or partitions. Frames set in concrete or masonry shall be painted with hot asphalt at its contact
surface and provided with two rows of common wire nails 100 mm long for anchorage. The nails
shall be staggered and spaced at 300 mm on center along each row. Frame set in concrete shall
be installed in place prior to concrete work.
Frames set in masonry work may be installed alter laying of hollow concrete blocks,
bricks or adobe. Space between frames and masonry shall be fully filled with cement mortar
proportioned 1:3.
b.Hinged Doors
Hinged doors, whether panel or flush type with standard height of 2100 mm and width of
not more than 900 mm shall be hung with four loose-pin butt hinges, 100 mm x 100 mm. Swing
out exterior doors shall be hung with four fast-pin butt hinges. Two hinges shall be fitted 150
mm from top and bottom edge of door. The other two hinges shall be fitted at third points
between top and bottom hinges. Care should be taken to ensure that the hinges are fitted such
that their pins are aligned for ease of pin insertion and smoothness of operation. For added
smoothness pins should be lightly greased. Hammering of hinges to attain proper, alignment
shall not be allowed.
For wider and heavier doors such as narra panel doors, an additional hinge shall be fitted
100 mm below the top hinge to counteract the door tilting action.
Mounting screws shall be screwed in place in their entire length, not forced into place by
hammering. Hammering of screw into place shall not be permitted.
c. Sliding Doors
Overhead tracks, standard, locally manufactured as per Plans shall be installed level and
mounting bracket secured in place with lag screws supplied with the set. Bracket shall be spaced
1000 mm 'on centers. Hangers, two each per door leaf, shall be per fitted and bolted to the dour
rail. For panel doors the hangers shall be centered on the door stiles. For flush doors, the hangers
shall be centered 100 mm from the edges of the door. If there is no adequate space for installing
the door with its attached rollers, through either end of the track the per fitted hangers shall be
disassembled for connection to the rollers.
After installation on the track, set the door plumb and in alignment by means of the
adjustment mechanism integrated with the roller assembly.
d.Lock Installation
Locks of doors shall be fitted at the same height, centered 1000 mm above the finished
floor level. Locks shall be installed in conformity with the templates and instructions supplied
with locksets. Holes for mounting locks shall be properly formed to provide snug fit and rigid
attachment of the locks to the doors. Strike plates shall be fitted on the door frame in true
alignment with the lock latch.
e.Sliding Type Window Sashes
Sashes shall be trimmed to fit height of opening. A clearance of 2 mm shall be provided
between the toungue’s base at the top rail and the bottom of the window head. Paraffin wax shall
be applied to contacts of sliding sufaces. The bottom rails shall be fitted with standard brass
guided spaced 75 mm from both ends of the rail, mounted flush with the inner face and secured
with three brass screws each guide.
f.Casement Type Window Sashes
Sashes shall be trimmed to fit size of opening, with provision for half lapping of meeting
stiles. Right side sash shall lap onto the left side sash. Sashes shall be fitted with two brass-plated
narrow hinges, 50 mm x 75 mm, spaced 150 mm from top and bottom of stiles. In lieu of hinges,
sashes maybe hung with cadmium-plated steel casement adjusters 200 mm long, subject to prior
approval of the Engineer. The top and bottom rails of casement type window sashes shall be
milled to provide for the installation of adjusters.
g.Awning type Window Sashes
Installation of awning type sashes shall be by means of casement adjusters specified
under Item 1010.3.2 (f).
1010.4 Measurement and Payment

Frames of doors and windows shall be measured and paid for on the basis of number of
sets completely installed and accepted by the Engineer.
Doors and windows shall be measured and for based on the number of square meters
involved in the completed and accepted installation. Payment per square meter shall include cost
of required hardware and all incidental expenses, but exclusive of locks for doors. Locks shall be
paid for per set completely installed.
The different pay items under Wooden Doors and Windows shall be designated the
following number, description and unit of measure:
Pay Item Description Unit of

Number Measurement
1010 (a) Frames (Jambs, sills, head

Transoms and mullions set
1010 (b) Doors (Flush or panel) m2
1010 (c) Window Sashes m2
1010 (d) Door Locks set
ITEM 1011 – ROLLING UP DOORS
1011.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing all plant, labor, tools, equipment and rolling up door
required as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.

Rolling up door shall be surfaced mounted type designed for exterior service opening as
indicated on the Plans. Component parts shall conform with the following material
specifications:
1. Curtain – shall be manufactured of interlocking curved or flat slats, rolled from galvanized and
bonderized steel, aluminum or stainless steel as the case maybe. Slats shall be of size and
thickness to withstand 0.957 KPa windload.
Curtain is composed of:
a) Interlocking slats shall roll up on a drum supported at head of opening on brackets

and shall be balanced by helical springs.
b) Endlocks – shall be malleable iron riveted to each ends of slats. These are called
continuous when they reinforce both ends of all slats, alternate when every other slat.
c) Bottom bar – shall be manufactured from two equal sized angles, minimum 3 mm
thick bolted back to back with appropriate half slat at lowest edge of curtain. In
addition, exterior door shall have compressible and replaceable rubber or vinyl
weather seal attached to bottom rail.
2. Counter balance barrel assembly – shall include spring barrel which serves as load carrying
beam encases counter balance mechanism and provide axis around curtain coils. Asit arises
barrelrings are involute shapes of malleable iron to assure proper counter balance for all points
of travel. Oil tempered torsion type counter balance springs are wound from heat treated steel,
to provide accuracy in balancing door.
3. Hood – shall be manufactured from 0.60 mm thick (minimum) galvanized sheet metal, flanged
at top for attachment to header and flanged at bottom to provide longitudinal stiffness. Hood
shall enclose curtain coil and counter balance mechanism.
4. Brackets – shall be made of precisely formed plate with permanently sealed ball bearings,
designed to enclose end of the curtain coil and provide support for counter balance pipe at
each end.
5. Guides – shall be fabricated from structural steel angles or precision roll formed channels and
angles. Especially adaptable for doors exposed to heavy wind pressure. Designed with groove
depths varying from 50 mm to 150 mm depending upon the width of the door, and set cut
from the face of the wall to facilitate the travel of the curtain.

Doors shall be mechanically operated and with provision for manual operation by means of
hand chain. Accessories needed for the satisfactory performance of the door shall be built-in with
the unit.
1011.3.1 Erection/Installation
a) Set and install structural steel angels properly aligned, plumb, level, square true to profile
section and rigidly anchored with adjacent concrete surface walls.
b) Allow all adjacent items of work to be completed before any installation work is started
except the installation of structural steel angels.
c) Assemble rolling up doors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual or
as indicated in the shop drawing approved.
d) All anchors and insets for guide, brackets and other accessories shall be located
accurately.
1011.3.2 Locking Devices

Curtain shall be located at each end of bottom bar by concealed slide bolts which shall
engage a lock wedge in each guide. A plunger type cylinder lock is provide as standard
equipment.
1011.3.3 Warranty
Upon completion and before final acceptance of the equipment; the Contractor shall furnish
the DPWH/Owner a written guaranty stating that the rolling up door equipment and accessories
are free from defects. The guaranty shall be for the period of one (1) year from the date of final
acceptance of the work. Any part of the equipment that becomes defective during the term of the
guaranty shall be replaced and made good by the Contractor at his own expense a manner
satisfactory to the DPWH/Owner.
1011.3.4 Method of Measurement

The work executed under this item shall bemeasured by actual units of rolling up door
installed at jobsite complete and ready for service. The computed unit shall bear type o materials
and area of opening covered and shall be accepted by the Engineer.
1011.3.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted work qualified and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at the
unit Bid price which constitutes full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools,
equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number Measurement
1011 (a) Rolling up door (indicate
Metal door size and type of
Curtain slats) unit/set
ITEM 1012 – GLASS AND GLAZING
1012.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all glass and glazing materials, labor, tools, plant and
requirement required in undertaking the proper installation as shown on the Plans and

All glass and glazing materials shall be delivered at jobsite with labels affixed indicating
quality, make type and thickness. Each glass in glazed position shall resist a design pressure of
244 kilogram per square meter.
1012.2.1 Plate Glass

Plate glass shall be manufactured from float glass that is mechanically rounded and polished
and sealed with a coating of silver and a uniform film of electrolytic copper planting, then
applied with protective coating of paint to seal out moisture from the silver. Use where good
vision is required.
1012.2.2 Float Glass

This basic type of glass shall be manufactured by “floating” continuous ribbon of molten
glass into a bath of molten tin where it is reheated to obtain a flat fire-polished finish and
annealed slowly to produce a transparent float glass thus eliminating grinding and polishing.
Used commonly in windows, sliding doors and windows walls. Variations of this basic type are
as follows:
Grade AA- Intended or use where superior quality is required.

Grade A- Intended for selected glazing.
Grade B- Intended for general glazing.
Greenhouse quality- Intended for Greenhouse glazing where quality is not important.
1012.2.3 Glazing materials for glass installation maybe:
a) Bulk compound such as:
a-1) Mastics that are elastic compounds and non-skinning compound.

a-2) Putties – shall be wood sash putty, or metal sash quality.
a-3) Sealant shall be chemically compatible with setting blocks, edge blocks and sealing
tapes.
b) Performed sealants such as:
b-1) Synthetic polymer shall be base sealants that is resilient or non-resilient type.
b-2) Performed gaskets shall be compression or structural type.
c) Setting and Edge Blocks shall be made o lead or neoprene, chemical compatible with
sealants.
d) Accessories like glazing clip, shims spacer strips, etc. shall be made from non-corroding
metal accessories.
1012.2.4. Schedule of Glass and Mirrors
1012.2.4.1 Use 5.6 mm (7/32”) thick sheet glass of locally manufactured clear quality (unless
otherwise indicated on the Plans as frosted) for the following:
a) Aluminum windows and doors, notwithstanding plate glass indicated elsewhere.

b) Jalousie window glass slats.
c) Fixed glass louvers.
d) Glass panels for partitions and counter door panels, if any.
e) Sliding glass doors for cabinets.
1012.2.4.2 All glass panels for cabinets, except sliding doors shall be clear glass of locally
manufactured float glass quality, 4.7 mm (3/16”) thick.
They shall be clear, except where indicated on the Plans as frosted, diffused or opaque. Same
shall be used for wooden sashes.
1012.2.4.3 Unless otherwise noted, clear glasses that are locally manufactured shall be used or
steel windows.
a) Use 3.1 mm (1/8”) thick for areas exceeding .069 square meters.
b) Use 4.7 mm (3/16”) thick for areas exceeding .609 square meters.
1012.2.4.4 All comfort rooms whether shown or not, the contractor shall provide and fit securely
in place at the most convenient height above each lavatory 1 mirror, made from local glazing
quality polished plate glass 6 mm thick with beveled edge and brass chromium plated frame 12
mm thick waterproof tan guile marine plywood backing, all in accordance with full size details.
Sizes are as follows:
a) Over single lavatories, 600 mm x 750 mm (24” x 30”).
b) For two lavatories, 1200 mm x 750 mm (48” x 30”).
c) For three lavatories, 1800 mm x 750 mm (72” x 30”).

Safety precaution and procedure shall be taken in determining the sizes and providing the
required clearances by measuring the actual opening to receive the glass. Movable items shall be
kept in closed and locked position until glazing compound has thoroughly set.
1012.3.1.1 All glass sheets shall be bedded, back puttied, secured in place and face puttied.
Secure glass in aluminum frame with non-corrosive clips except where glazing beads are
required. Apply putty in uniformly straight lines, with accurately formed bevels and clean-cut
corners; remove excess putty from glass.
1012.3.1.2 Set glass in hollow metal doors and in metal frames of interior partition in felt
channel insets or added in putty to prevent any rattle; secure glass in wood doors and wooden
frames with glazing stops; secure stops on doors with screws.
1012.3.1.3 Glass breakage caused in executing the work or by faulty installation shall be
replaced by the Contractor without extra cost.
1012.3.1.4 Improperly set glass which does not fully meet requirements of its grade shall not be
accepted and shall be replaced without extra cost.
1012.3.1.5 The Contractor shall provide and install complete set ready for use, mirrors in all
comfort rooms and elsewhere shown on the Plans. Size and location for each mirror shall be as
indicated on the Plans.
1012.3.2 Workmanship
1012.3.2.1 All glass shall be accurately cut to fit opening and set with equal bearing on the entire
width of pane.
1012.3.2.2 Putty shall be neatly run in straight lines parallel with inside of glazing rebate; corners
shall be carefully made; all excess putty shall be removed and surface left clean.
1012.3.2.3 Apply a thin layer of putty to rebate and set glass or putty, pressing until an even bed
is secured; place spring wire or angle glazing clips and run face putty; remove excess putty shall
be removed and surface left clean.
1012.3.3 Cleaning
Clean all glass on both sides after putty has been applied completely. Do not disturb edge of
putty with scraper. At completion of work leave glass and glazing works free from cracks and
rattles and clean on both sides.
1012.3.4 Samples
The Contractor shall submit for approval duplicate sample (150 mm x 250 mm) of each type
of glass bearing manufacturer’s label and a can of each type of putty.
This item shall be measured by actual area of glass sheets installed respective of the quality
type and thickness in square meters. The quantified unit of measurement shall be those accepted
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The quantities Item prescribed in sub-section 1012.4 shall be paid for the unit bid price
which payment constitute full compensation for all glass and glazing materials and other
facilities, labor and incidents necessary to complete this Item.
Pay ItemNumber Description Unit of Measurement
1012 (a) Float Glass m²

1012 (b) Ordinary window and Sheet glass m²
1012 (c) Plate Glass m²
ITEM 1013 – CORRUGATED METAL ROOFING
1013.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all plant equipment, tools, materials and labor required
to properly perform and complete the corrugated metal roofing, together with related accessories
such as ridge/hip rolls, valleys, gutters and flashing, when called for on Plans all in conformity
with his Specifications.
1013.2.1 Corrugated and Plain Galvanized Iron Sheets

Corrugated galvanized iron (G.I.) sheets, including plain G.I. sheets for roofing accessories,
shall be cold-rolled meeting ASTM A 153 and with spelter coating of zinc of not less than 0.381
kg/m² (1.25 ounces/square foot), conforming to ASTM A 525 OR pns 67:1985. Unless
otherwise specified or shown on Plans roofing sheets shall be gauge 26 (0.48 mm thick) and
provided in long span sizes to minimize end laps. Sheets shall weigh not less than 3.74 kg/m²
and shall be marked or stamped showing the gauge, size, amount of zinc coating, brand and
name of manufacturer. Test specimens shall stand being bent through 180° flat on itself without
fracture of the base metal and without flaking of the zinc coating.
1013.2.2 Strap Fasteners

Strap fasteners shall be gauge 26 G.I. 25 mm wide and sufficiently long to bend around up to
the opposite face of purlin, with corners chipped off at the riveting ends.
1013.2.3 Rivets, Washers and Burrs

Rivets and washers shall be galvanized mild iron. Rivets shall not be less than 5 mm in
diameter and 10 mm in length. Washers shall not be less than 1.5 mm thick and 20 mm in
outside diameter. Washer’s inside diameter shall provide snug fir to the rivet.
1013.2.4 Soldering Lead

Soldering lead shall have a composition of 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead, conforming to
ASTM B 32.
Rivets and burrs for lap joints of gutters, downspouts and flashing shall be copper not less
than 3.175 mm in diameter (No. 8).
1013.2.5 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessories

Ridge/hip rolls, valleys, flashing and counter flashings, gutters and downspouts, whenever
required, shall be fabricated from plain G.I. sheets. Ridge/hip rolls, flashings and counter
flashings shall be gauge 26. Valleys, gutters and downspouts shall be gauge 24 unless otherwise
specified on Plans. Wire basket strainers shall be galvanized, gauge 24.
Roof ventilators, whenever required shall be fabricated from gauge 26 plain G.I. sheets and
constructed to the dimensions and details shown on Plans.
1013.3.1 Preparatory Work

Preparatory Work to the installation of the corrugated G.I. roofing, purlins should have been
placed and spaced properly to fit the length of roofing sheets to be used such that the centerline
of the purlins at end laps are 150 mm from the bottom line of end laps and intermediate purlins
are place equidistantly. Top of purlins should be at the same plane.
1013.3.2 Installation of Corrugated G.I. Sheets

Installation of corrugated G.I. sheets with end laps shall start at the lower part of the roof and
proceed towards the directon of monsoon wind with side laps of two-and-a-half (2-1/2)
corrugations. End laps shall be 250 mm minimum. Each sheet shall be fastened temporarily by
1.83 mm diameter by 25 mm long galvanized flat head nails at valleys of corrugations covered
by side or end laps.
Succeeding upper rows of corrugated G.I. sheets shall be installed in the same manner until
the entire roof area is covered.
Valleys, ridge/hip rolls and flashings when required, shall be installed before fastening the
roofing sheets with galvanized straps and rivets. One strap shall be riveted at each alternate
corrugation at the gutter line, the ridge line and at end laps and the straps bent around and nailed
to the purlins. Riveting at intermediate purlins between end laps shall be done at every fourth
corrugation. Rivet shall be provided with a galvanized mild iron washer below and one lead and
one galvanized iron washer above the sheet. Rivet shall be sufficiently long to permit forming a
hemispherical head. Riveting shall be done such that the lead washer shall be compressed to
provide a watertight fit around the rivet.
1013.3.3 Installation of Roofing Accessories
a) Ridge and Hip Rolls

Ridge and hip rolls shall lap at least 250 mm over roofing sheets and, together,
shall be riveted at every second corrugation.
b) Valleys
Valleys shall lap at least 450 mm each way under the roofing sheets and shall be secured
to the framework with galvanized nails, such nails placed below the roofing sheets. Rivets
along side of the valley shall be at every second corrugation.
c) Flashing
Flashing, of gauge 26 plain G.I. sheets, unless otherwise specified, shall be installed
along intersections of roofs with concrete or masonry walls in accordance with details shown
on Plans. Flashing running parallel to sheet corrugation shall lap at least two corrugations
with edge turned down. Flashing across sheet corrugation or at an angle thereto, shall lap at
least 250 mm and the edge of flashing turned down at each corrugation. The vertical portion
of flashing adjoining wall shall be at least 200 mm wide and provided with counter flashing.
d) Counter Flashing
Counter flashing sheets of gauge 24 plain GI shall be built into preformed wedge-shape
groove of concrete or masonry wall. The edge to be built into wall groove shall have a 25
mm strip bent 45 degrees and shall be sealed in the groove with cement mortar or caulking
compound.
e) Reglets
Reglets when required per plans in connection with counter flashing shall be fabricated
products approved by the Engineer, complete with fittings. Reglets shall be located not less
than 200 mm or more than 40 mm above roofing. Reglet plugs shall be spaced not more than
300 mm on centers. Open-type reglets shall be filled with fiber board or other suitable
separator to prevent crushing of the slot during installation. The counter flashing shall be
inserted into the full depth of reglet and the reglet lightly punched- every 300'mm to crimp
the reglet and the counter flashing together.
f) Gutters
Gutters, from gauge 24 plain G.I. sheets, shall be fabricated to the shape and dimensions
indicated on the Plans. The rear side of the gutter shall have a 12.5 mm strip bent 30 degrees
and shall be not less than 12.5 mm higher than the opposite side. Gutter joints shall be flat
seam folded in the direction of flow and soldered evenly. Otherwise, gutter joints shall be
lapped at least 25 mm, fastened together with 3.175 mm diameter (No.8) copper rivets and
burrs, and sealed by soldering along both exposed edges of lap.
Gutter shall be attached to fascia board or roof nailer with galvanized nails or screws
spaced at not more than 900 mm on centers and at a point slightly higher than leading edge of
gutter. As additional support, gutter shall have plain G.I. strap hangers 25 mm wide fastened
to roof nailers by screw shank-type nails and riveted to the gutter':; leading edge. Strap
hangers shall be spaced at not more than 900 mm on centers. When shown on Plans that
gutter is not fixed to fascia board or purlin, gutter shall be supported by wrought iron (W.I.)
hangers not less than 4.75 mm thick and 19 mm wide spaced at not more than 900 mm on
centers. W.I. hanger shall be fabricated to fit configuration of the gutter and attached to fascia
board or purlin with two (2) No.8 flat head wood screws.
Gutter shall be installed with a pitch of 1 in 100 slope to downspout.
g) Downspouts
1) Downspouts
Unless specified otherwise, downspouts shall be plain G.I., thickness fabricated to the
dimensions shown on the Plans and installed at indicated locations. Downspout shall be
secured to the wall with G.I. straps 25 mm wide, spaced at more than 1000 mm and
anchored with concrete nails. Inlets of downspouts shall be fitted with gauge 14 wire
basket strainers.
2) Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Downspouts
When shown on Plans that downspouts are other than G.I. sheets, downspouts shall
be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes and fittings with dimensions indicated
and conforming with ASTM D 3033 and D 3034. Joints shall be made with either solvent
cement or rubber "O-rings" depending on the design of fitting for the joints. Rubber "O-
rings" shall be neoprene type, heat and oil resistant, complying with ASTM F-477.
Downspout shall be secured to adjoining wall with plain G.I. straps 25 mm wide and
spaced at not more than 1000 mm.
g) Roof Ventillators
Roof ventillators, whenever shown on Plans shall be firmly secured to the roofing or roof
structure by means of rivets, Roof ventillators installed on the roof at places other than the
ridge shall be provided with adequate flashing around intersection with roofing to ensure
watertight joints.
1013.3.4 Joints of G.I. Roofing Accessories
a) Soldered Joints
Joints made by lapping coupled with riveting shall be rendered watertight by soldering.
All edges of uncoated sheet metal to be soldered shall be pretinned before soldering.
Soldering shall be done slowly with well heated iron in order to thoroughly heat the seam and
sweat the solder completely through the full length of the seam. Upon completion of
soldering, acid shall be neutralized by washing thoroughly with water.
b) Non-soldered Joints
Non-soldered joints of G.I. gutters, downspouts and flashings shall be done by flat lock
seams. Two adjoining edges of lock seam shall be bent 90°. One bent strip shall be at least 15
mm wide and the connecting piece shall have a bent strip twice in width which shall be bent
down over the upturned narrower strip and pressed together. Once properly interlocked, the
joint shall be flattened such that the edge of the wider strip be concealed.
1013.3.5 Roof Installation on Metal Purlins

Installation on metal purlins shall follow the same procedure as that on wood purlins,
except that fastening shall be done with thread-cutting, zinc-coated steel screws, No. 12 by 50
mm. having hexagonal heads and provided with neoprene washers. Screw holes shall be drilled
using 5 mm (13/64") diameter bit.
1013.3.6 Water Leak Test

The completed roofing shall be tested for water tightness at side and end laps at joints of
roofing sheets with ridge/hips rolls, valleys and flashings by means of water spray system. The
water-spray system shall have nozzle which will deliver water pressure of 2 kg/cm2 directly to
the joint being tested in such manner and for a duration directed by the Engineer. All defective
works as determined by this test shall be remedied by the contractor at his expense and the test
shall be repeated until the work is found satisfactory.
Roofing sheets shall be measured and paid for on an area basis in square meters or part
thereof, such roofing sheets including all laps, fasteners and rivets as installed complete and
accepted.
Ridge/hip rolls, flashings, valleys, gutters and down-spouts shall be measured in linear
metre of completed and accepter work such measurement shall include necessary straps and
fixings required for complete installation.
Roof ventilators shall be measured and paid for per unit completely installed and
accepted.
The different pay Items under roofing work shall be designated the following number,
description and unit of measure:
1013.2.1 Corrugated roofing, gauge 26 m2
1013.2.2 Fabricated metal roofing accessories:

a) Ridged/hip rolls, flashings, gutters and 1m
downspouts, gauge 26
b) Valleys, counter flashing gutter and
downspouts, gauge 24 1m
1013.2.3 Roof ventilators each

Payment for completely installed and accepted roofing sheets and required fabricated
metal roofing accessories shall be based on actual measurement and the corresponding contract
unit price thereof. Payment based on contract unit price shall constitute full compensation.
ITEM 1014 - PREPAINTED METAL SHEETS
1014.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all pre-painted metal sheet materials, tools and
equipment, plant including labor required in undertaking the proper installation complete as
shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.

All pre-painted metal sheet and roofing accessories shall be oven baked painted true to
profiles indicated on the ·Plans.
1014.2.1 Pre-Painted Roofing Sheets
Pre-painted roofing sheets shall be fabricated from cold rolled galvanized iron sheets
specially tempered steel for extra strength and durability. It shall conform to the material
requirements defined in PNS 67: 1985. Profile section in identifying the architectural moulded
rib to,be used are as follows: Regular corrugated, Quad-rib, Tri-wave, Rib-wide, twin-rib, etc.
Desired color shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
1014.2.2 Gutters, Valleys, Flashings Hip and Ridge roll shall be fabricated from gauge 24 (.600
mm thick) cold-rolled plain galvanized iron sheets specially tempered steel. Profile section shall
be as indicated on the Plans.
1014.2.3 Fastening hardware shall be of galvanized iron straps and rivets. G.I. straps are of .500
mm thick x 16 mm wide x 267 mm long (gauge 26 x 5/8" x 10-1/2") and standard rivets.
1014.2.4 Base metal thickness shall correspond to the following gauge designation available
locally as follows:
a) Base Metal Thickness Designated Gauges

.400 mm thick Gauge 28
b) Protective Coatings Thickness
1. Zinc 34.4 microns
(244 gm/m2)
2. Paint coatings
Top coat 15.20 microns
Bottom coat 6.8 microns
c) Overall thickness with protective coats
d) .400 mm .428-451 mm
.500 mm .532-551 mm
.600 mm .638-651 mm
e) Length of roofing sheets - available in cut to length long span length up to 18.29 meters
f) Special length and thickness are available by arrangements.

Before any installation work is commenced, the Contractor shall ascertain that the top
faces of the purlins are in proper alignment. Correct the alignment as necessary in order to have
the top faces of the purlins on an even plane.
1014.3.1 Handling/Lifting/Positioning of Sheets

Sheets shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the paint coating. Lift all sheets or
sheet packs on to the roof frame with the overlapping down-turned edge facing towards the side
of the roof where installation will commence, otherwise sheets will have to be turned end-to-end
during installation.

1014.3.2.1 Start roofing installation by placing the first sheet in position with the downturned
edge in line with other building elements and fastened to supports as recommended.
1014.3.2.2 Place the downturned edge of the next sheet over the edge of the first sheet, to
provide side lap and hold the side lap firmly in place.Continue the same procedure for
subsequent sheets until the whole roofing area is covered and/or (Adopt installation procedure
provided in the instruction manual for each type of Architectural molded rib profile section).
1014.3.2.3 For walling applications follow the procedure for roofing. Allow a minimum end lap
of 100 mm (4”) for vertical walling.
1014.3.3 Gutters, Valleys, Flashing ridge and Hip rolls

Gutters, valleys, flashing ridge and hip rolls shall be fastened where indicated on the
Plans by self-tapping screws or galvanized iron straps and rivets.
1014.3.4 End Laps

In case handling or transport consideration requires to use two or more end lapped sheets
to provide full length coverage for the roof run, install each line of sheets from bottom to top or
from eave line to apex of roof framing. Provide 150 mm minimum end lap.
1014.3.5 Anchorage/Fastening
1014.3.5.1 Pre-painted steel roofing sheets shall be fastened to the wood purlins with standard
length G.I. straps and rivets.
1014.3.5.2 For steel frame up to 4.5 mm thick use self drilling screw No. 12 by 35 mm long
hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
1014.3.5.3 For steel support up to 5 mm thick or more use thread cutting screw No. 12 by 40 mm
long hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
1014.3.5.4 Side lap fastener use self drilling screw NO.1 0 by 16 mm long hexagonal head with
neoprene washer.
1014.3.5.5 Valley fastened to lumber and for walling use self-drilling wood screw No. 12 by 25
mm long hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
1014.3.5.6 Valleys fastened to steel supports use selfdrilling screws, hexagonal head with
neoprene washer. Drill size is 5 mm diameter.
1014.3.6 Cutting of Sheets
1014.3.6.1 In cutting pre painted steel roofing sheets and accessories to place the exposed color
side down. Cutting shall be carried out on the ground and not over the top of other painted
roofing product.
1014.3.6.2 Power cutting or drilling to be done or carried out on pre-painted products already
installed or laid in position, the area around holes or cuts shall be masked to shield the paint from
hot fillings.
1014.3.7 Storage and Protection

Pre-painted steel roofing, walling products and accessories should be delivered to the
jobsite in strapped bundles. Sheets and/or bundles shall be neatly stacked in the ground and if left
in the open it shall be protected by covering the stack materials with loose tarpauline.

The work done under this Item shall be measured by actual area covered or installed with
pre-painted steel roofing and/or walling in square meters and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer/Architect.

The area of pre-painted steel roofing and/or walling in square meters as provided in
Section 1014 shall be paid for at the unit bid or contract unit price which payment shall
constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidents necessary to complete
this Item.
1014 (a) Pre painted metal sheets m2
ITEM 1015 - CLAY ROOF TILE
1015.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all plant, labor, tools, equipment and clay roof tiles
required to complete the roofing as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1015.2.1 Clay Roof Tiles

Tiles shall be manufactured from red clay specie, moulded to custom tile patterns. It shall
be kilned after drying to improve natural aesthetic appearance and resistance to erosion and
withstand any climaic condition in the tropics. Where required and indicated to be glazed, color
shall be approved by the Engineer.
1015.2.2 Sheathing:
a) Corrugated G.I. subroofing Corrugated

G.I. subroofing shall be 0.50 mm thick, long span.
b) Plywood Sheathing
Plywood sheathing when used instead of G.I., shall be 12 mm thick marine plywood treated with
two piles of felt paper, asphalt impregnated.
1015.2.3 Wood Batens
Wood batens shall be 25 mm x 50 mm pressure treated lumber properly laid to fit clay
roof tiles and accessories as indicated on the Plans.
1015.2.4 Fasteners
Fasteners shall be manufactured from non-corrosive materials. Nails shall have large
head with sufficient length to give 19 mm penetration on wood battens and #16 tie wires to be
copper of brass as the case maybe.

Before any work is started the Contractor shall secure approved roof framing Plan and
determine/evaluate actual site condition. In case modification is necessary the Contractor shall
submit shop drawings to the Engineer for approval.
1015.3.1 Preparatory Work

Battens shall be installed in straight lines, level, squared and firm. It may rest on
sheathing and anchored rigidly by means of galvanized iron straps 0.60 mm thick riveted on
sheathing, or nailed on top chord or jack rafter when it rests on plywood sheathing. Top chord or
jack rafter shall have at least a minimum roof pitch of 250 degrees. Plywood sheathing shall be
overlaid with two plies of felt paper, asphalt impregnated to control moisture. Battens shall be
spaced to fit the clay roof tiles and accessories.
1015.3.2 Tinsmithry Works (Gutters, Valleys)

Gutters and valleys shall be set in place before wood battens are installed. Use 0.60 mm
thick (gauge 24) plain galvanized iron sheet moulded true to profile section indicated on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1015.3.3 Clay Roof Tiles on Concrete Roof Slab

Provide and install pressure treated lumber 25 mm x 50 mm or metal strips properly
aligned, level squared and firm. Apply waterproofing on slab surface to control moisture by cold
process.
1015.3.4 Clay Roof Tile Installation Procedure
1015.3.4.1 Start laying at the lower layer from right to left. See to it that the left anchorage of tile
is placed near or close to hip truss as much as possible.
1015.3.4.2 Continue to the next layer of clay roof tiles following the same procedure. After all
clay roof tiles are laid out, mark the clay roof tiles at hips and valleys which are to be cut using
straight edge or string as guide.
1015.3.4.3 Cut one by one tiles that the application of clay roof tile accessories and fill opening
under roll of tile with mortar. Color to match the clay roof tile installed.
1015.3.4.4 Install hip stringer and cut hips on job.Where tiles join hip stringer, provide
waterproof elastic cement.Cement hip roll and ridge in lap and fasten with nails/tie wires as
specified.Fill voids at hip starters and ridge ends with mortar, color to match tile.
1015.3.4.5 Remove all debris and clean roof area ready for service.

This Item shall be measured by actual roof area laid with clay roof tiles and accessories in
square meters or part thereof, for work completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

The accepted work quantified and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at
the unit Bid price which constitutes full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools,
equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1015 (a) Clay roof tile m2
ITEM 1016 - WATERPROOFING
1016.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all waterproofing materials, labor, tools, equipment
and other facilities and undertaking the proper installation works required as shown on the Plans
and in accordance with this Specification.
1016.2.1 Cement-base Waterproofing
1016.2.1.1 Cement-base waterproofing powder mix shall be cement-base, aggregate type, heavy
duty, water-proof coating for reinforced concrete surface and masonry exposed to water. The
aggregates are graded and sized so as to mesh perfectly and are selected for purity, hardness,
strength and are non-metallic. When mixed with other ingredients are free flowing, water-proof
coatings that possesses strength durability and density.
1016.2.1.2Additive binders shall be of special formulation of acrylic polymers and modifiers in

liquid form used as additive with cement-base powder mix that improves adhesion and
mechanical properties.
1016.2.1.3 Water shall be clean, clear and potable.
1016.2.2 Membrane Waterproofing
1016.2.2.1 Primer shall be of asphalt cold applied, free from water and other foreign matters, and
shall conform to the specifications requirement defined in ASTM 0-41.
1016.2.2.2 Built-up membrane shall be made of smoothly woven fibers that are impervious to
acid, heat, and dampness and totting. It should permit complete penetration of asphalt compound
or bituminous coating in the woven glass fiber.
1016.2.2.3 Preformed membrane shall be self-sealing flexible cold applied bituminous sheets
bonded to 0.15 mm thick polyethylene film.
1016.2.2.4Mopping Materials
a)Type A soft adhesive self-sealing asphalt for structure below ground level.
b)Type B where asphalt is not exposed on temperature exceeding 51.7 celcius for structure above
ground level.
c)Type C where asphalt is exposed on vertical surface in direct sunlight or above temperature of
51.7 Celsius structure above ground level.
1016.2.3 Liquid waterproofing alternate material shall be of elastomeric or other substances

applied in liquid form and cured to an impervious membrane.
1016.2.3 Hydrolithic Waterproofing

a)Hydrolithic waterproofing mix shall be of heavy cement-based coating compatible to
reinforced concrete wall. It must prevent built-up of water vapor which causes blistering, flaking
and peeling of paint films.
b)Material must thoroughly fill and seal pores and voids that it can be used against water
pressure on the interior surface of walls below grade.

Roof decks, balconies, toilet and bathrooms, gutters, parapet walls and other areas
indicated on the plans to be waterproof shall first be rendered with cement-based waterproofing
before any type of waterproofing is applied.
1016.3.1 Surface Preparation
1016.3.1.1 Concrete surface to be applied with waterproofing shall be structurally sound, clean
and free of dirt, loose mortar particles, paints films oil, protective coats, efflorescence laitance,
etc.
1016.3.1.2 All defects shall be properly corrected and carefully formed to provide a smooth
surface that is free of marks and properly cured prior to application works.
1016.3.1.3 Inside corners where vertical and horizontal structure meet shall be provided with
cants measuring 50 mm by 50 mm or rounded at corners a minimum of 50 mm radius.
a) Concrete slabs shall be properly graded to drain rainwater. Provide a minimum pitch of 1 on
100 satisfactorily drain rainwater freely into the drainage lines, gutters and downspouts.
b) Drainage connections and weep holes shall be set to permit the free flow of water.
c) Any expansion and contraction joints shall be cleaned, primed, fitted with a backing rod and
caulked with sealant.
d) Provide reglets of about 40 mm deep by 40 mm wide and 250 mm above floor finish along
walls or parapets for the termination of the membrane.
e) Prepared surfaces shall be cured and kept wet by sprinkling with water at regular intervals for
a period of at least three days and allow surface to actually set within seven days.
f) Ensure that the prepared surface has completely set and all defects repaired.
g) When there is reasonable doubt as to the presence of moisture in the surface to be applied with
membrane expose that same direct to sunlight for another 2 days or heat all suspected area using
blow torch.
1016.3.2 Preformed or built-up membrane
1016.3.2.1Application procedure
a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound and cured without the use
of curing compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to remove oil dirt’s and other
contaminants.
b) Apply asphalt primer at the rate of one gallon per 100 square feet evehly by spraying or by
paint brush.
c) Application shall be done one direction strip by and overlapping each other to assure uniform
thickness.
d) Allow primer to dry until it is ready to receive next coat or layer as specified in the
manufacturing instructional manual.
e) As soon as primer coating is workable, lay a single layer of preformed or built-up membrane
smoothly free from irregularities and folds.
f) Lay preformed or built up membrane conforming to size and shape of the surface area to be
covered.
g) Carefully lay side and end laps in order to assure an even thickness throughout the whole,
surface area to be covered.
h) When the whole surface area is completely covered apply a single coat of asphalt primer at the
rate of 3 to 4 gallons per (100 square feet).
i) Meshes of treated woven glass fibers shall not be completely closed or sealed by the primer
coat, but shall sufficiently open to allow successive mopping of the ply material to seep through.
j) Cover ply not more than the minimum amount of surfacing necessary to prevent sticking on
ply.
k) After application surface shall be uniformly smooth, free from irregularities folds and knots.
l) Repeat the procedures until 5 plies have been satisfactorily installed or as many layers required
or specified in the plans.
m) Where weather disturbance interrupt the work and exposing the membrane to moisture
remove the layer exposed to moisture and repeat procedure until completion of the process.
1016.3.2.2Protective Coatings
a) Where laying of the built-up or preformed membrane conforms with the number of plies
required as shown on the plans lay a mixture or sand mastic in the proportion of one part asphalt
or bituminous material and four parts coarse screened sand by volume. With a steel trowel at an
average of 3 mm thick over the surface of membrane.
b) Then at the rate of one gallon per (100 square feet) apply aluminum heat reflecting finish
thoroughly over the dried sand mastic coating.
1016.3.2.3Metal Cap Flashing
a) Provide cap flashing gauge 24 plain G.I. where shown on the Plans.
b) Where cap flashing is connected to preformed lock in through-wall form upper edge' of cap
flashing to engage .in preformed lock. Mallet lock down tight to provide a spring action against
base flashing.
c) Then at the rate of one gallon per (100 square feet) apply aluminum heat reflecting finish
thoroughly over the dried sand mastic coating.
d) Where cap flashing is terminated in raked joints or in prepared masonry or stone reglet fasten
flashing with wedge every 12 inches and fill reglet on vertical surfaces continuous with plastic
cement and on horizontal surfaces, continuous with molten lead.
1016.3.3 Membrane Waterproofing Cement Topping
a) Provide concrete cement topping of at least 50 mm thick on the membrane after five days
where protective coatings has been applied.
b) Concrete cement topping should be class "A" with 9 mm pea gravel and preferably provided
with 2-way 6 mm dia. temperature steel bars.
1016.3.4 Liquid Waterproofing as Membrane
Before any coat of liquid waterproofing is applied concrete cement surface shall conform
to the requirement defined in sub-section 1017.3.1.1.
1016.3.4.1Application procedure
a) Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound and cured without the use
of curing compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to removed oil, dirt and other
contaminants.
b)Apply a primer coat of elastomeric coating standard of the manufacturer at the rate of 1/3
gallon per 9.28 meter square 100 square feet over the surface area to be applied.
c) After the primer coat has dried penetrating and sealing the concrete surface areas coated apply
25 dry mills of coating at the rate of one gallon per 100 square meters for 3 coatings on the same
concrete surface areas coated with liquid waterproofing.
d) The concrete surface areas coated shall be allowed to dry in twenty four hours if relative
humility is above 4.44 Celsius.
e) Liquid waterproofing membrane may be applied by paint brushairless spray, notched trowel,
squeegee or roller preferably 20-25 mills maximum thickness each wet coat.
1016.3.4.2 Precaution
a) Liquid waterproofing membrane should not be applied unless the ambient temperature is 4.44
Celcius or higher and should not proceed during inclement weather condition.
b) Extra care shall be observed by persons doing the application works especially those that
have skin sensitiveness must wear gloves while applying the liquid waterproofing. The liquid
water-proofing membrane compound is highly combustible.
1016.3.5 Protection of membrane waterproofing surfaces in general.

a) Concrete topping in situation where it is desirable to have a bond between membrane
waterproofing and topped slab it is recommended that the concrete topping be placed as the
membrane dries, usually 48 hours after final coat is applied.
b) If a bond is not required, the membrane should be protected with asphalt asbestos board or
asphalt felt paper such time as topping or concrete covering is applied. Prior to topping or
placing concrete covering the membrane shall be inspected and initiate repair work where
necessary.
c) Exposed membrane surfaces at concrete gutters and areas not frequently disturbed may be
allowed.
d) Membrane waterproofing at basement shall be covered and,' protected' by installing tightly
butted asphalt impregnated protection boards with a minimum thickness of 6 mm and preferably
12 mm on horizontal areas.
All projections and pipes must be protected with asbestos cloth approximately'6 mm
thick. Install the bituminous paving with extra care to avoid damage, lift or curl the underlying
protection boards.

This Item shall be measured in square meters for areas actually rendered with membrane
waterproofing and number of packages for integrally waterproofed areas accepted to the

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1017.4 shall be paid for at the
Contract unit price for integral and membrane waterproofing work which price and payment
shall be full compensation for furnishing and applying integral and membrane waterproofing
materials including the use of equipment and tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete
the work.
Pay Item Description Unit of Number Measurement

1016 (a) Cement-base waterproofing m2
1016 (b) Liquid waterproofing m2
1016 (c) Built-up and Preformed
membrane m2
ITEM 1017 - ROOF DRAINS WITH STRAINERS
1017.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all items, articles, plant, equipment, labor and
materials and performing all methods necessary or required for the complete installation of all
roof drains with strainers in accordance with all applicable drawings as shown on the approved
Plans.

The roof drains with strainers specified herein shall be from the "JOSAM' catalog of the
JOSAM Manufacturing Company, Michigan City, Indiana, notwithstanding what are shown on
the Plans. The series and type number herein designate the quality and style, design and
operation material and finish of drains desired. Any drain with strainer of approved equivalent
locally made may be substituted subject to the approval of the Engineer. Equivalent materials, if
locally available will be acceptable.
Should the series and type numbers specified herein be not suitable to a particular
location due to concrete space limitation, an adequation of the series specified of the same size,
body materials and finish may be, substituted subject to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide, fit and install all necessary drains with trainers where so
shown or indicated on the Plans, and/or where the engineer directs. Each drain with strainer shall
fit well without leaks into 1e corresponding downspout or conductor over which it is to be
installed and in accordance with the following schedule:
Roof Eaves and Gutter

Where so indicated on the Plan, "JOSAM" series 4820-BF, type 4823-BP, cast iron
lacquer finish, roof drain with round flange, cast iron rough brass high dome secured to clamping
ring by screws, 4-inch deep body (for locally made, 6-inch deep body) with bottom outlet; for
"side outlet" "JOSAM" series 4870-BP, type 4873-BP, series 4863-BP.
Any other roof drain shown on the Plans not specified herein or neither shown on the
Plans, but necessary to leave the work complete, shall be provided and fitted by the contractor
suitable to the service required and fitted to the concrete limitations at the point of installation,
based on or similar to those specified herein.

All roof drains with strainers actually installed shall be measured and determined by the
number of pieces or units ready for services as provided in the Bill of Quantities accepted to the

The items measured and determined as provided in subsection 1017.4 shall be paid for at
the unit bid price which payment constitute full compensation of materials, labor and incidentals
Pay Item Number Description Unit of measurement
1017 Roof drains with strainers pcs/ set
ITEM 1018 - CERAMIC TILES
1018.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all ceramic tiles and cementitious materials, tools
and equipment including labor required in undertaking the proper installation of walls and floor
tiles as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1018.2.1 Ceramic tiles and trims shall be made of clay, or a mixture of clay and other materials
which is called the body of the tile. Tile bodies are classified by ASTM C 242 as to their degree
of water absorption. Ceramic tiles and trims are manufactured either by dust-pressed process in
which the clays are ground to dust mixed with a minimum of water shaped in steel dies and then
fired or by plastic process in which the clays are made plastic by mixing with water, shaped by
extrusion or in molds and then fired.
1018.2.1.1 Glazed Tiles and Trims

Glazed tiles' and trims shall have an impervious face of ceramic materials fused onto the
body of the tiles and trims. The glazed surface may be clear white or colored depending on the
color scheme approved by the Engineer. Standard glazes may be bright (glossy) semimatte (Less
glossy) matte (dull) or crystalline (mottled and textured; good resistance to abrasion). Glazed
tiles are used principally for walls; crystalline glazed tiles may be used for floors provided
how8ver that these are used as light duty floors.
1018.2.1.2 Unglazed Tiles

Unglazed tiles shall be hard dense tile of homogeneous composition.
Its color and characteristics are determined by the materials used in the body, the method of
manufacture and the thermal treatment. It is used primarily for floors and walks.
1018.2.1.3 Trims
Trims are manufactured to match wall tile color, texture and to coordinate with it in
dimension. These are shaped in various ceramic trim units such as caps, bases, coves, bullnoses,
corners, angles, etc.that are necessary for edging or making a transition between intersecting
planes.
1018.2.1.4 Accessories
Accessories like some soap holders and shall be made wall mounted type with colors to
reconcile with the color of the adjacent wall tiles.
1018.2.1.5 Cement
Cement shall be Portland conforming to the specification requirements defined in Item
700, Hydraulic Cement.
1018.2.1.6 Sand
Sand shall be well graded fine aggregate clean river sand, free from soluble salts and
organic impurities.
1018.2.1.7 Lime
Lime shall be hydrated lime with free un hydrated oxide and magnesium oxide content
not to exceed 8 percent by weight.

Tile work shall not be started until roughing-ins for plumbing, electrical and other trades
have been completed and tested. The work of all other trades shall be protected from damage.
1018.3.1Surface Preparation
a) Mortar mix for scratch coat and setting bed shall consist of one part Portland cement 1/4 part
lime and 3 parts sand by volume. Surface to receive tile must be level, true to elevation, dry, free
from dirt, oil and other ointments. Allow at least seven days curing of scratch coat and setting
bed.
Installation work shall not be allowed to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
b) Bond coat shall be portland cement paste.
1018.3.1.1 Thoroughly dampen surfaces of masonry or concrete walls before scratch coat is
applied.
1018.3.1.2 On masonry or concrete surface first apply a thin coat with pressure, then bring it out
sufficiently to compensate for the major irregularities of the surface to a thickness not less than
10 mm. at any point.
1018.3.1.3 Evenly rate scratch coat to provide good mechanical key before the mortar mix has
fully hardened.
1018.3.2Installation Procedure
Ceramic tiles shall be soaked in clean water prior to installation for a minimum of one
hour
1018.3.2.1Ceramic Glazed Wall Tiles
a) Determine and mark layout of ceramic tiles, joint location, position of trims and fixtures so as
to minimize cut less than one-half tile in size.
b) Thoroughly dampen surface of wall but do not saturate surface.
c) Apply a bond coat mix with consistency of cream paste 1.5 mm thick to the wall surface or to
the back of the tile to be laid.
d) Lay the tiles true to profile then exert pressure and tamp tile surface before the bond coat mix
has initially set.
e) Continue with the next full tile to be laid and pressed firmly upon the setting bed tamped until
flush and in place of the other tiles.
f) Intersections and returns shall be formed accurately using the appropriate trims.
g) All lines shall be kept straight and true to profiles, plumbed and internal corners rounded
using the appropriate trims.
1018.3.2.2Vitrified Unglazed Floor Tiles
a) Before tire is applied the floor surface shall be tested for levelness or uniformity of slope by'
flooding it with water. Area where water ponds are filled or levelled, shall be retested before the
setting bed is applied.
b) Establish Ijnes of borders and center of the walls at the field work in both direction to perrhit
the pattern to be laid with a minimum of cut tiles.
c) Clean concrete subfloor then moisten but do not soak. Then sprinkle dry cement over the
surface and spread the mortar on the setting bed.
d) Apply and spread mortar mix for setting bed and tamp to assure good bond over the entire
area to be laid with tile.
e) Pitch floor to drain as shown on Plans or as directed by the Engineer
f) Allow the setting bed to set sufficiently to be worked over then spread a bond coat over the
surface and lay tile in accordance with Items 1019'.3.2.1 a, b, c,d, e, f, g.
1018.3.3 Grouting and Pointing
1018.3.3.1 Tiles shall have laid in place for at least 24 hours before grouting of the joints is
started. Grouting mortar shall be white Portland cement or blended with pigments to acquire the
color appropriate for the ceramic tile.
1018.3.3.2 Grouting mortar shall be applied over the tile by float or squeegee stroked diagonally
across the joints. Remove excess mortar with a wet sponge stroked diagonally or in a circular
motion after 12-15 minutes. Follow with a barely damp or dry sponge to remove remaining haze
while smoothing all grouted joints.
1018.3.3 Cleaning
a) Clean ceramic tile surfaces thoroughly as possible upon completion of grouting.

b) Remove all grout haze, observing tile manufacturers recommendations as to use of acid or
chemical cleaners.
c) Rinse tile thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners.
d) Polish surface of tile with soft cloth.
1018.3.4 Protection from Construction Dirt
a) Apply a protective coat of neutral cleanser solution diluted with water in the proportion of 1:4
or 1 liter cleanser concentrate to 1 gallon water.
b) In addition, cover tile flooring with heavy-duty no staining construction paper, taped in place.
c) Just before final acceptance of the work remove paper and rinse protective coat of neutral
cleaner from tile surface. Do not let protective paper get torn 'or removed.

All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters for areas
actually laid with ceramic tiles and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Ceramic tile work determined and provided in the Bill of Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1018.2.1.1 Glazed tiles and trims m2

1018.2.1.2 Unglazed tiles m2
ITEM 1019 - WOOD TILES
1019.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installing of wood tiles on the area indicated on
the Plans and in conformity with this Specification.

Wood tile flooring shall be Narra, Tanguile or other wood specie, kiln-dried of not more
than fourteen percent (14 %) moisture content of the best quality manufactured locally.
1019.2.1 Wood tiles shall have a minimum dimension of 150 mm x 150 mm x 19 mm. Two-ply
pieces shall be prefabricated by the manufacturer into rectangular, square or other block shapes
as designed and secured together by wood splints, set into ends or sides.
1019.2.2 Adhesive shall be waterproof glue. The consistency of the adhesive shall suit local
conditions at the time of laying and the quality of the adhesive shall be such as to bind the wood
tiles permanently to the subfloors.

No work shall be started until plastering on the interior surfaces of walls has been
completed and dry windows and glazings are installed, and exterior doors are completely
operational.
Before wood tiles are laid, sub-floors shall be perfectly dry, thoroughly cured, level and
true to elevation as required on the Plans.
Wood parquet tiles shall be installed by the manufacturer, this type of job being a
specialty trade to assure of the type of adhesive, the proper equipment and tools and the
guarantee of quality and workmanship and other considerations. The following installation
instructions shall be followed strictly:-
a) Provide adequate cross ventilation as a drying aid during the installation of wood tile.
b) Clean thoroughly the area over which wood tile will be installed or laid and make certain that
the surface over which the material will be held is dry.
c) Plan and mark carefully installation layout.
d) Spread enough adhesive to permit the laying of two (2) to three (3) wood tile blocks at a time
beginning at the starting lines marked.
e) Lay the wood tile on surface coated with adhesive and apply hard pressure to seat the
materials firmly.
f) After laying, dampen the gummed paper then pell it off.
g) Adjust and reseat, when necessary, any individual fillets without decreasing the spacing
between individual fillets.
h) Allow a drying period of 24 hours; then smooth surface using an electric sanding machine
with the proper number of sand paper grit.
i) Seal all defects exposed upon the process of sanding if manageable, otherwise the defective
wood tile shall be remove and replaced with new wood tile without extra cost.
j) Whenever necessary scrape carefully with a hand scraper tool and thoroughly sandpaper
smooth works near to walls, corners and other parts which cannot be reach by the electric
sanding machine.
1019.3.2 Precaution
Wood tile shall be laid so as to provide a free open space for expansion around sides of
room, such space shall be to equal to 5 mm for each meter in width and or length of room.
Clearance between trims and floor shall be at least 1.6 mm. Expansion joints at doorways shall
be covered by saddle.
Temperature of room shall be maintained at approximately 85° degrees Fahrenheit during
laying.
Adhesive shall be applied in strict compliance with manufacturer's manual. Mastic shall
be spread to a minimum thickness of 24 mm with a notch spreader.
1019.3.3 Guaranty
The Contractor shall furnish a written notice that work under this Item will be free from
defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work.
Defects such as creaking, loosening, lifting, cracking, bulging, splitting, undue warping
and undue shrinkage shall be adjusted.
This guaranty will not apply to defects covered by failure of the work of others, if such
defects were impossible to detect at the time of the examination of other works, or defects caused
by other than the wear and tear of normal service.

All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters based on actual
wood tile installed in the building.

The quantified area determined and as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
at the unit Bid or Contract unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation including
labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1019 (a) Narra wood tile m2

1019 (b) Tanguile wood tile m2
1019 (c) Other specie as specified m2
ITEM 1020 - VINYL FLOOR TILES
1020.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all vinyl tiles and fitting accessories, adhesive
materials, labor, tools equipment and the satisfactory performance in undertaking the proper
installation of vinyl tile flooring as shown on the Plans and in accordance with this Specification.
1020.2.1 Vinyl Tiles

Vinyl tiles shall be of first grade quality measuring 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm thick,
fully homogeneous, flexible, resilient and resistant to alkali moisture, grease and oil. The color
and design pattern of vinyl tile shall be uniformly distributed throughout the thickness of the tile.
1020.2.2 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be best suited for tropical application and compatible with the vinyl tiles
to be installed.
1020.2.3 Seal Polish

Seal polish shall be plastic emulsion suited for the particular type of floor as
recommended by the vinyl tile manufacturer.
1020.3.1.1 General: Installation of the tile shall not commence until the work of other trades.
including painting has been completed. The Contractor shall' carefully examine all surfaces over
which the tiles are to be set. Floor 'surfaces that are to receive vinyl tile shall be clean
thoroughly, dry, smooth, firm and sound and free from oil, paint, wax, dirt and any other
damaging material.
1020.3.1.2 Tile Laying Design

The tile laying design shall be indicated on Plans and in the colors selected and approved
by the Engineer for each area. All joints shall beparallel to wall lines. Where line patterns of tile
run perpendicular to lines of other tiles, they shall be laid truly at right angles.
1020.3.1.3 Adhesive
Adhesive shall be applied in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's printed
directions, unless specified or directed otherwise.
Smoking, the use of open flames and other sources of ignition are strictly prohibited in the area
where solvent containing adhesive are being used or spread.
1020.3.1.4 Application of the Tile

Start in the center of the room or area and work from the center towards the edges. Keep
tile lines and joints square, symmetrical, tight and even; and keep each floor in a true, level
plane, except where indicated as sloped. Vary edge width as necessary to maintain full size tiles
in the field but no edge tile shall be less than one half the field tile sizes, except where irregular
shaped rooms make it impossible.
1020.3.1.5 Cutting
Cut vinyl floor tile to and fit around all permanent fixtures, pipes and outlets. Cut edges,
fit and scribe to walls and partition after flooring has been applied.
1020.3.1.6 Edge Strips

Provide edging strips where flooring terminates at points higher at doorways where
thresholds are provided. Edge strip shall be extruded aluminum butty type and beveled at
exposed edges. The top surface of the metal strips shall be finished flush with the tiles.
Secure strips at the end and between at about 200 mm apart with screws. Submit samples
of metal strips for approval before application and installation.
1020.3.1.7 Cleaning and Waxing

After the vinyl tiles and accessories are laid and set, it shall be cleaned with a cleaner as
recommended by the manufacturer and a cost of approved seal polish.
1020.3.1.8 Protection
After the floor has been waxed, they shall be carefully protected against damage, either
with heavy building paper or by keeping traffic off the floors until the area is ready for use.

All works performed under this section shall be measured in square meters/linear meters
or actual numbers of vinyl floor tiles installed complete with accessories and ready for service.

The actual area in square, linear meters or number of Quantities shall be the basis of
payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
1020 Vinyl Floor Tile m2 0r lnm or No. of places
ITEM 1021 - CEMENT FLOOR FINISH
1021.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment in
undertaking cement floor finishing where shown on the Plans and in accordance with this
Specification.

Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unbroken
packages or containers which are labeled plainly with the manufacturer's name and trademark.
1021.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to the requirement of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1021.2.2 Fine Aggregates

Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed, Sharp River sand and free from dirt, clay, organic
matter or other deleterious substances. Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used
with the Engineer's approval but in no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for
use as coarse aggregate.
1021.2.3 Coloring Material

The coloring material shall be red or green oxide powder of the quality capable of
achieving the best staining power and homogeneity.
1021.2.4 Metallic Floor Hardener (Premix)

Metallic floor hardener shall be a mixture of oil-free specially graded clean iron particles,
mineral oxide pigment and Portland cement binder, premixed according to the manufacturer's
instruction manual.
1021.2.5Non-Metallic Floor Hardener
a) Powder type hardener shall be silica quartz aggregates, workability admixtures, mineral oxide
pigments and Portland cement mixed according to the manufacturer's instruction manual.
b) Epoxy type topping hardener shall be a combination of epoxy resins filled with hard and
natural emery or silica quartz aggregates, premixed according to the manufacturer's instruction
manual.
1 021.3.1 Mixture
Concrete topping materials shall be measured accurately in accordance with the
following:
a) Mortar topping shall be one (1) part Portland cement and three (3) parts fine aggregate by
loose volume.
b) Finish topping shall be pure Portland cement properly graded conforming to the requirements
of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement, mixed with water to approved consistency and plasticity. Where
required to be colored cement floor finish, red or green oxide powder shall be premixed with
Portland cement complying with finish topping requirements and the desired color intensity.
Cement floor finish floor hardener shall be premixed as required and applied in accordance with
the manufacturer's instruction manual.
1021.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surface

Surface to receive mortar concrete topping shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose
particles and other foreign matters.
Finish elevation shall be established over the areas indicated on the Plans.
Before any mortar concrete topping is applied, the prepared concrete base surface shall
first be wetted and grouted with Portland cement.
a) Mortar topping of the thickness specified on the Plans, shall be spread over the prepared
concrete base and shall be float finished using wood hand trowel. Batches of mortar topping shall
be emplaced within one hour of mixing thereof.
b) As soon as the water sheen has disappeared the surface shall be lightly scratched with a stiff
bristle broom
c) The finish topping mixture whether plain, colored, or with floor hardener shall be spread over
the lightly scratched surface before final set taken place and hand troweled to produce a smooth
surface.
d) The finished surface shall be free of trowel marks, have uniform texture and true to a plane
within an allowable tolerance of 3 mm in 3.0 meters.
1021.3.4 Protection of Finished Surface

Cement floor finished surface shall be covered with burlap or appropriate covering to
avoid injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water and mechanical injury.
Cement floor shall be finished level and true to finish elevation as shown on the Plans
Finish topping shall have no visible junction marks where one (1) day's work adjoins the other.
V-cut groove lines shall be provided where shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

All cement floor finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof tor work
actually completed and accepted.

The work actually completed and accepted as measured in square meters shall be paid for
at the Unit Price or contract price which price constitute full compensation including labor,
materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

1021 (a) Plain cement floor finish m2
1021 (b) Colored cement floor finish m2
1021 (c) Cement floor finish with floor m2
hardener
ITEM 1022 - STUCCO FINISH
1022.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, equipment including labor
required in undertaking the proper application of stucco finish as shown on the Plans and in
accordance with this Specifications.
1022.2.1 Cement
Portland cement (white or ordinary gray) shall conform with the specification
requirements defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1022.2.2 Marble Dust
Marble dust shall be derived from domestic marble that are hard and well graded.
1022.2.3 Acoustical Fiber

Acoustical fiber materials shall be first grade quality and a product distributed by a
reputable manufacturer engaged in acoustical material.

Well surface and other masonry areas indicated on the Plans to receive stucco shall be
cleaned of all projection, dust loose particles andforeign matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted
with potable water before application of scratch coat.
1022.3.2Type of Mixture
a) For stucco used as acoustical treatment the proportion shall be 1 part cement and three parts
acoustical fiber measured by volume or as recommended by the acoustical manufacturer.For
exterior and interior walls without acoustical treatment the proportion shall be one (1) part
cement blended with two parts marble dust in the case where white cement is used but for
ordinary gray cement use one (1) part cement and two parts washed sand with 1/2 part lime
measured by volume.
1022.3.3Installation or Application Methods
a) Stucco mixture can be applied with the use of hard brooms made from coconut material.
b) It can also be applied using sandblasting equipments operated manually or electrical driven
machine compressor
c) For an impressive architectural (appearance) effect the applied surface is slightly troweled
before stucco mix has began to set. This surface finish is also called anay finish.
Stucco finish shall be properly applied true to details, squared and plumbed.

All stucco finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work actually
completed in the building.

The work quantified and determined in subsection 1033.4 as provided in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price which price constitutes full compensation
for all stucco finish necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Number Description Unitof Measurement
1022 (a) Stucco Finish m2

ITEM 1023 GRANOLITHIC MARBLE WORK
1023.1 Description
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to
install granolithic marble flooring where shown on the Plans and specified herein.

The contractor shall submit 300 mm x 300 mm samples of granolithic marble flooring to
the Engineer for approval, showing the color texture, finish and materials including an outline of
the proposed method of surface preparation and the installation of the granolithic marble
flooring. Included shall be the details of where and how the divider strips shall be installed.
1023.2.1 Marble Chips (Granules)

Marble chips shall be standard quarry products of the size and color necessary to match
the approved samples.

White and Ordinary Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 Type I: and relevant
Philippine National Standard.
1023.2.3 Divider Strips

Divider strips shall be the brass angle type of 3 mm thickness spaced at 600 mm on
centers.
The extent of granolithic flooring areas shall be as indicated in the Finish Schedule and as
shown on the Plans.
The divider strips shall be installed at least 24 hours, prior to application of the
granolithic mix with the tops protruding to a minimum of 0.8 mm above the projected finish
floor elevation.
Place the granolithic mix and trowel to level surface. Trowel led surface shall be seeded
with additional chips if required.
1023.3.2 Curing
The granolithic topping shall be cured at least six (6) days before grinding or until such
time when it has set sufficiently hard to permit machine grinding or rubbing with coarse
carborandum grit without disclosing any surface aggregate.
1023.3.3 Surfacing
After curing all granolithic topping surfaces shall wet and ground with electric grinding
machine to a smooth and even surface. Where it is not possible to use electric grinding machine,
surface shall be hand-rubbed.Use No. 24 abrasive grit stone for the initial rubbing, then followed
by No.40 abrasive grit stone rubbing, after which a light grouting of white Portland cement paste
(grout) of creamy consistency as the matrix used in thetopping. Grout shall remain on the surface
until the time of final grinding and cleaning.
1023.3.4 Finishing
Allow at least 72 hours after th8 granolithic surface have been grouted before removing
the grout coat (cleaning and fine stone grinding) by electric grinding machine using no coarser
than No. 80 abrasive grit.
Final grinding or rubbing of granolithic marble surface shall remove scratches and
produce a true surface of uniform color and texture without objectionable irregularities of any
description as that of the approved samples.
1023.3.5 Cleaning, Waxing and Polishing

Upon completion of final grinding or rubbing of granolithic marble the Contractor shall
apply two coats of natural wax penetrating type. Surface shall be allowed to dry and polished.

All granolithic marble finish indicated on the Plans and described herein shall be
measured in square lineal meters or part thereof for work completed and accepted to the

The quantified area determined in the preceding section and provided in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or contract Unit Price.
1023 (a) Corridors m2

1023 (b) Stairs Landing, risers, etc. square, linear m.
1023 (c) Rooms and others m2
ITEM 1024 - PEA GRAVEL WASHOUT FINISH
1024.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools and' equipment required in
undertaking the proper application of pea-gravel washout finish as shown on the Plans and in
1024.2.1 Pea Gravel

Pea gravel specie shall be of well grades sizes consisting of 4 mm to 8 mm round
variation wash river gravel.
1024.2.2 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to the specification requirements defined in Item 700,
Hydraulic Cement. Use one brand of Portland cement throughout the pea gravel washout finish
mix.
All pea gravel washout finish shall be done by me:l experienced and qualified to do this
particular type of trade. The contractor shall submit at least two (2) samples to the
Engineer/Architect for approval measuring 300 mm x 300 mm showing its color, texture and
design patterns.
1024.3.1Surface Preparation
a) Walks, ramps, driveways and elsewhere indicated on the Plans as pea gravel washout finish -
Shall be properly sloped and rendered under bed.
b) The underbed mixture shall be spread to bring mortar underbed to a level of 16 mm below the
finish floor line.
c) For concrete masonry walls, columns etc. the surface to be applied shall be first rendered a
scratch coat and made true to plane, leveled plumbed and squared then allowed to cure for seven
(7) days.
1024.3.2 Mixture and Proportion

Pea gravel washout mix shall consist of one part Portland cement and two (2) parts pea
gravel measured by volume or a proportion equivalent to 1:2. Mixtures shall be in approved
containers to ensure that the specified materials are controlled and accurately measured.Mixture
measured by shovel or shovel counts will not be permitted.Unless specified otherwise pea gravel
washout mix shall be in the proportion by volume in approved mixing machines or mortar boxes.
The aggregates introduced and mixed in such a manner that the materials will be uniformly
distributed through -out the mass. A sufficient amount of water shall be added gradually and the
mass further mixed until a mortar plasticity necessary for the purpose intended is obtained.
Mortar boxes, pans etc. where mixtures are mixed shall be kept clean and free from debris or
dried mortar.
1024.3.3Application
a) Before, work is started; the slope for drainage should be properly done and provided in the
underbed prepared. Concrete setting bed must be rough and all loose particles or anything which
diminish bond shall be thoroughly cleaned off. The concrete underbed must be kept wet for at
least four (4) hours before the pea gravel mix is applied.
b) Pea gravel washout mix shall be applied with pressure to obtain solid adhesion to the
underbed and setting bed. The finished surface shall be firm, even and monolithically applied.
When the surface applied with pea gravel mix has sufficiently set the cement paste shall be
removed by use of sponge or water spraying equipment used in this specialty trade in order to
expose the pea gravel quarter face but still intact.
1024.3.4 Curing, Cleaning and Finishing

As soon as possible as the pea gravel are exposed to desire appearance the surface shall
be covered with damp burlap or other approved covers. At the proper time when surface are
semi-dry and stable allowing the applied surface to cure?
1024.3.5 Protection
For proper curing, keep the pea gravel washout finish moistened for a period of at least
seven (7) days by thoroughly welting the surface three (3) times a day and protecting it from the
strong rays of the sun with burlap of layer of sand.
Upon completion of the work and the surface has completely seasoned wash with clean
water and brush thoroughly to produce a clean and sparkling appearance and protected until
work has been accepted.

All works done under this Item shall be measured in square meters/ lineal meter or part
thereof for work completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The quantity determined in Item 1018.4 Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the
unit bid or contract unit price as stated in the Bill of Quantities, which price constitute full
compensation including labor materials, 100ls and incidentals to complete this Item.

1024 (a) Pea-Gravel washout finish In/m2
ITEM 1025 - BUSH HAMMERED FINISH
1025.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing a[1 materials, labor, tools and equipment, plant and
other facilities and undertaking the proper application of Bush Hammered finish complete
required as shown on the Plans and n accordance with this Specification.
The contractor shall submit for approval samples of each applied finish 300 mm x 300
mm of different shades to the Engineer. Approved samples shall be kept for future reference.
1025.2.1 Cement
Cement shall be ordinary gray Portland cement conforming with the specification
requirement defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement. One brand of Portland cement shall be used
throughout the plaster mortar mix.
1025.2.2 Adobe Aggregate

Adobe aggregate shall be crushed and pulverized to an approved graded size improving
its mixing ability as coarse aggregate.

Wall surfaces to be rendered with bush hammered finish shall be scratch coated with
plaster cement mortar and be made true to plane, plumbed and squared. The scratch coat must be
properly cured within seven days.
1025.3.2 Mixture of Adobe Plaster Mortar

Adobe plaster shall be a mixture of Portland cement, crushed and pulverized graded
adobe stones. It shall be uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part Portland
cement and two parts adobe aggregates (1:2 proportions).
1025.3.3 Application Procedure
1025.3.3.1 Before any application work is commenced all wood moulds for horizontal and
vertical groove joints shall be first established and set.
The scratch coat has to season for seven days.
1025.3.3.2 Surfaces to be applied with adobe plaster motar shall be thoroughly moistened with
fog spray.
1025.3.3.3 Adobe plaster mortar shall be floated to a true and even surface. It may also be
floated/troweled to a hard fluted surface with series of grooves also known as corduroy finish.
1025.3.3.4 As soon as the plastered finish is hard enough to react hammering, the surface is
textured by hammering with an ax or hatchet leaving or exposing the natural appearance of the
aggregate composition of mortar mixture.
Bush hammered finish shall be level, plumbed squared and true to a tolerance of 3 mm
without 3 m without caves, crack blisters, pits crazing, discolorations, projection or other
imperfections. Plastering work shall be formed carefully around angles, contours and cants.
Special care shall be taken to prevent 'sagging and consequent dropping of applications. There
shall be no junction marks in the finish where one day work adjoins another. Where required and
as directed by the Engineer provide vertical and horizontal groove joints.
1025.3.5 Curing and Protection

Upon completion of the work all surfaces shall be cleaned with steel brush and water to
removed loose particles leaving the cleaned surfaces in its natural appearance. When cleaned
surfaces dries spray a coat of water repellant.

Bush hammered finish shall be measured per area actually done in square meter
completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The work quantified and determined in the preceding section or as provided in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for at the Contract unit bid which price and payment constitute full
compensation including labor, materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
Pay Item Number Description Method of Measurement
1025 (a) Bush hammered finish m2

1025 (b) Fluted bush hammered finish m2
ITEM 1026- PEBBLE WASHOUT FINISH
1026.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment required in
undertaking the proper application of pebble, washout finish as shown on :!le Plans and in
1026.2.1 Pebble
Pebble shall be well graded stones sized ranging from #4 to #10 rounded specie like Luna
Stones, Boracay, etc.
1 026.2.2 Cement
Cement shall be Portland type conforming to Item 700, Hydraulic Cement. It can be of
gray or white specie depending on the tone or color scheme approved.
1026.2.3 Colored Cement

Colored cement shall be powder type pigmented used to obtain the desired shade and
color of finish.

All pebble washout finish shall be done by men experienced and qualified to do this
particular type of trade. The Contractor shall submit at least two samples for each type of pebble
washout finish to the Engineer/ Architect for approval showing its color, texture and design
patterns.

Surface to receive pebble washout finish shall be clean of all projection, dust, loose
particles and foreign matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before application of
scratch coat mortar. When surface has sufficiently set scratch with hard broom.
1026.3.2 Mixture
Pebble washout finish mix shall consist of one part Portland cement and two parts pebble
measured by volume or a proportion equivalent to 1:2. Mixtures shall be in approved containers
to ensure that the specified materials are controlled and accurately measured. Mixtures measured
by shovel or shovel counts will not be permitted. Unless specified otherwise pebble washout mix
shall be in the proportion by volume in approved mixing machines or mortar boxes. The
aggregates introduced and mixed in such a manner that the materials will be uniformly
distributed throughout the mass. A sufficient amount of water shall be added gradually and the
mass further mixed until a mortar plasticity necessary for the purpose intended is obtained.
Mortar boxes, pans etc. where mixtures are mixed shall be keep clean and free from debris or
dried mortar.
1026.3.3Application
a) Before any application, work is started the Contractor shall establish all wood mould for
vertical and horizontal groove lines after the scratch coat has seasoned for seven .days in the
case of masonry wall or concrete columns, beams, parapets, etc.
b) In the case of finish flooring application and the like the slope of drainage .should be properly
provided and design pattern properly placed. The proposed underbed shall be done to a level
of 16 mm below the finish floor line to accommodate the pebble washout mix.
c) The prepared surfaces to receive the pebble washout mix shall be kept damp for at least four
(4) hours before the application work is commenced.
d) Pebble washout finish mix shall be applied with pressure to obtain solid adhesion to the
prepared surface.
e) The applied surface shall be firm, even and monolithic ally applied, then allowed to set
initially.
f) When the applied surface has initially set to withstand the removal of the cement paste spray
evenly by spray apparatus to washout and cement paste on the outer surface so that the
pebbles are partly exposed or by means of paint brush and water, or by means of spray
washing down the cement paste leaving the pebbles partially exposed in their natural texture
appearance.
1026.3.4Workmanship
a) Pebble washout finish shall be leveled, plumbed, squared true within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3
m without caves cracks, blisters, pits crazing, discoloration, projections, or other imperfections.
b) Special care shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent drooping of applications.
c) There shall be no invisible junction marks in the finish surface where one day work adjoins
another.
d) Where required or directed by the Engineer/ Architect provide vertical and horizontal groove
joints.
1026.3.5Curing and Protection
a) When the pebble washout surface has finally set the surface shall be kept wet or moist for at
least six days.
b) After all other trade have been completed the pebbles washout finish surfaces shall be
saturated with diluted hydrochloric acid and cleaned with steel brush.
c) Allow the clean surface to dry then apply a coat of silicon water repellant to protect the natural
physical appearance of the pebble washout finish.

Pebble washout finish shall be measured in square meters, lineal meters or part thereof
for work actually completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Architect.

The work done under this Item as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at
the contract unit bid which price and payments constitute full compensation including labor,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
1026 (a) Pebble washout In/m2
ITEM 1027 - CEMENT PLASTER FINISH
1027.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all cement plaster materials, labor, tools and
equipment required in undertaking cement plaster finish as shown on the Plans and in accordance

Manufactured materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unbroken
packages or containers which are labelled plainly with the manufacturer's name and trademark.
1027.2.1 Cement
Portland cement shall conform with the requirements as defined in Item 700, Hydraulic
Cement.
1027.2.2 Hydrated Lime

Hydrated lime shall conform with the requirements as defined in item 701, Hydrated
Lime.
1027.2.3 Fine Aggregates

Fine aggregates shall be clean, washed sharp river sand and free from dirt, clay, organic
matter or other deleterious substances. Sand derived from crushed gravel or stone may be used
with the Engineer's approval but in no case shall such sand be derived from stone unsuitable for
use as coarse aggregates.
1027.3.1 Mixture
a) Mortar mixture for brown coat shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed in the
proportion by volume of one part Portland Cement, three (3) parts sand and one fourth
(1/4) part hydrated lime.
b) Finish coat shall be pure Portland Cement properly graded conforming to the
requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement and mixed with water to approved
consistency and plasticity.
a) After removals of formworks reinforce concrete surfaces shall be roughened to improve

adhesion of cement plaster.
b) Surfaces to receive cement plaster shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles,
grease and bond breakers. Before any application of brown coat is commenced all
surfaces that are to be plastered shall be wetted thoroughly with clean water to produce a
uniformly moist condition.
a) Brown coat mortar mix shall be applied with sufficient pressure starting from the lower
portion of the surface to fill the grooved and to prevent air pockets in the reinforced
concrete/masonry work and avoid mortar mix drooping. The brown coat shall be lightly
broomed/ or scratch before surface had properly set and allowed to cure.
b) Finish coat shall not be applied until after the brown coat has seasoned for seven days and
corrective measures had been done by the Contractor on surfaces that are defective. Just
before the application of the finish coat, the brown coat surface shall be evenly moistened
with potable water. Finish coat shall be floated first to a tue and even surface, then
troweled in a manner that will force the mixture to penetrate into the brown coat.
Surfaces applied with finish coat shall then be smooth with paper in a circular motion to
remove trowel marks, checks and blemishes. All cement plaster finish shall be 10 mm
thick minimum on vertical concrete and/or masonry walls.
Wherever indicated on the Plans to be "Simulated Red Brick Finish", the Contractor shall
render brick design on plaster surface before brown coat had properly set and then allowed to
dry. Cement plaster shall not be applied directly to:
a) Concrete or masonry surface that had been coated with bituminous compound and,
b) Surfaces that had been painted and previously plastered.
Cement plaster finish shall be true to details and plumbed. Finish surface shall have no
visible junction marks where one (1) Day's work adjoins the other. Where directed by the
Engineer or as shown on the Plans vertical and horizontal groove joints shall be 25 mm wide and
10 mm deep.

All cement plaster finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work
actually completed in the building.
The work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
at the Contract Unit Price which price constitutes full compensation including labor, materials,
tools and equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

1027 (a) Cement plaster finish m2
1027 (b) Simulated red bricks.pn142 m2
ITEM 1028 - SYNTHETIC ADOBE
1028.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing synthetic adobe materials, labor, tools and
equipment necessary and undertaking synthetic adobe works as shown on the Plans and in
accordance with this Specifications.
1028.2.1 Adobe Stones

Adobe stones shall be crushed and pulverized to an approved size improving its mixing
ability as aggregate. It shall conform to the approved sample submitted showing the specie color
and design.

Portland cement shall conform to the Specification requirements defined in Item 701
Hydraulic Lime. One brand of Portland cement shall be used throughout the synthetic adobe
mortar mix.

Walls to be applied with synthetic adobe shall be scratching coated with cement plaster
and be made true to plane, level, plumbed and squared. The scratch coat must be properly cured
within seven days.
1028.3.2 Mixture
Synthetic adobe tool finish shall be a mixture of crushed and pulverized adobe stones and
Portland cement. It shall be uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of one part Portland
cement and two parts crushed and pulverized adobe stones. Where approved to blend sea shell or
marble chips the same shall be premixed.
The Contractor shall establish all wood mould for groove joints after the prepared surface
has seasoned for seven days. The surface shall be evenly moistened with fog spray. Synthetic
adobe plaster mix shall be floated toa true and even surface. It may also be troweled to a hard
flutedsurface with series of grooves. As soon as the plastering is hard enough, the surface is
textured by means of fine hammering to produce the desired external effect.
1028.3.4 Types of Textural Tool Finish
a) Bush hammered synthetic adobe finish

The applied adobe plaster when appropriate to react shall be finished with fine
hammering. The textured surface shall expose the natural appearance of the aggregate
composition of mix.
b) Flutted bush hammered finish

The applied surface of series of groove done with wood mould patterns shall be
textured by fine hammering exposing the aggregate composition to the natural
appearance.
c) Piqueta tool finish

The applied surface shall be textured by using an ax or hatchet leaving parallel
line markings improving its textural appearance.
Synthetic adobe finish shall be level, plumbed squared and true to a tolerance of 3 mm
without caves, cracks blisters, pits, crazing, discolorations, projections or other imperfections.
Plaster work shall be formed carefully around angels, contours and cants. Special care shall be
taken to prevent sagging and consequent dropping of applications.There shall be no junction
marks in the finish where one day work adjoins another. Where required and as directed by the
Engineer provide vertical and horizontal groove joints.

Upon completion of the work and surfaces had completely set clean with water and steel
brush so that loose particle shall be removed leaving the exposed surface in its natural
appearance.

Synthetic adobe tool finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work
actually completed and accepted to the satisfaction of, the Engineer.

The work quantified and determined in the preceding section 1031.4 Method of
Measurement shall be paid for at the Contract unit price which price and payment constitute full
compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.

1028 (a) Bush hammered synthetic adobe finish m2
1028 (b) Fluted bush hammered synthetic m2
adobe finish
1028 (c) Piqueta tool finish synthetic finish m2
ITEM 1029 - GRANATITE WASHOUT FINISH
1029.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all granitite washout materials, labor, tools and
equipment requires in undertaking granitite washout finishing works as shown on the Plans and
in accordance with this Specification.
1029.2.1 Marble Granules

Granules shall be domestic marble chips, hard and well graded. Size 1 granules shall pass
6 mm mesh sieve and retained on a 3 mm mesh sieve. Size 2 granules shall pass 9 mm mesh
sieve and retained on a 6 mm mesh sieve.
1029.2.2 Pea Gravel

Pea gravel shall be clean, hard, uniformly rounded and graded to approximate size of 6
mm minimum diameter and used for blending to acquire the approved color harmony (Pre mixed
with marble granules).
1029.2.3 Cement
Portland cement (white or ordinary gray) shall conform to the Specification requirement
defined in Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.

Surface to receive granitite washout finish shall be cleaned of all projection, dust, loose
particles and foreign matters. It shall be thoroughly wetted with potable water before application
of scratch coat. Plastered surface shall be scratched before final setting of mortar mixed.
1029.3.2 Mixture
Granitite washout mixed shall be a mixture of Portland cement marble granules blended
with pea gravel and Portland cement. It shall be uniformly mixed in the proportion by volume of
one part white or gray Portland cement and two parts marble granules and one half part pea
gravel.
The Contractor shall establish all wood moulds for groove lines after the scratch coat has
seasoned for seven days. The scratch coat shall be evenly moistened with fog spray before
granitite washout plaster shall be troweled and floated to a true and even surface.
1029.3.4 Texture Finishing

Finishing shall be started as soon as the granitite washout plaster surface begins to set and
is semidry, spraying evenly by a spray apparatus to washout all cement paste on the outer surface
so that the aggregate are partly exposed or by means of a paint brush and water, or sponge and
water washing down the remaining cement paste leaving the granules in their natural texture
appearance.
Granitite washout finish shall be leveled, plumbed, squared and true within a tolerance of
3 mm in 3 m without caves, cracks, blisters, pits, crazing, discolorations, projections or other
imperfections. Plaster work shall be formed carefully around angles, contours, and cants. Special
care shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent drooping of applications. There shall be no
visible junction marks in the finish where one day's work adjoins another. Where required and as
directed by the Engineer provide vertical and horizontal groove joints.

When the granitite washout finish has finally set, the surface shall be kept wet or moist
for at least six days.
After curing and all other trades as completed their works the granitite washout finished
surfaces shall be saturated with potable water.
Cleaning shall be done with a steel brush. When surface dries, silicon water repellant shall be
applied to protect physical appearance of the granitite washout finish.

Granitite washout finish shall be measured in square meters, lineal meters or part thereof
for work actually completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The work done under Item 1027.4 as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for at
the Contract unit price which price and payment constitute full compensation including labor,
materials, tools and equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

1029 (1) Granitite washout finish m2, Im
ITEM 1030 - ACCOUSTICAL CEILING
1030.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing acoustical ceiling materials, tool, labor
and equipment necessary as shown on the Plans and Specifications.

All acoustical materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unbroken
packages or containers which are labeled plain with manufacturer's name and trademark. All
materials shall be carefully handled and delivered at the jobsite and provided with a storage for
materials or damage by water or dampness. All acoustical ceiling materials shall be provided
with non-combustible mineral fiber and have a 9. 12, 15 mm thickness and must have the
following physical properties as hereunder specified.
PROPERTY FIGURES TEST METHOD
1. Thickness Tolerance = 0.2 mm JIS A 6307

2. Density 320 350 kg/m2 JIS A 6307
3. Moisture Content 1.0 2.0% JIS A 6307
2
4. Flexural Strength 20-25 kgf/cm JIS A 6307
5. Thermal Conductivity 0.047 kcal/mhc0 JIS A 6307
6. Light Reflectance LRI(87%) ASTM C 523
7. Non-combustibility Approved by the Japanese Ministry of Construction as non-
combustible Class 1 under the approval of No.1021
8. Flame Spread Class 1 (O-25) ASTM E 84
9. Flame Spread Class 25 US Federal Specs SS-s 118a

The acoustical ceiling materials to be used shall conform to the samples approved by the
Director of Bureau of Design. All acoustical works shall be done by men experienced and
qualified to do this particular specialty trade.
1030.3.1 Inspection of Surfaces

The acoustical contractor shall verify and examine all surfaces covered and the conditions
under which all acoustical ceiling work is to be performed and must notify all unsatisfactory
conditions and no work shall be performed unless all unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected by the Engineer.
1030.3.2 Preparation of Surfaces

Before any installation of work begins, all surfaces must be clean, dry, level and free
from irregularities and tested for adhesive bond.
1030.3.3 Installation of Acoustical Ceiling Materials

The installation of acoustical materials shall be in accordance with the detailed section
and with the manufacturer's manual instructions. Acoustical materials shall be cut as required to
fit the perpendicular condition and should be properly secured by anchorage and other
accessories to complete the installation. No mechanical work shall be exposed on the finish
work. All joints around electrical outlets, pipes, and other work extending through materials shall
be sealed with caulking.
1030.3.4 Cleaning of Surfaces

The finished surfaces shall be cleaned and must be free from any spots, dirt marks and
dust by the use of soft art gum eraser. For larger areas with larger smudges, use a chemical
treated new sponge rubber pad or wallpaper cleaner. Dust shall be removed by brushing lightly
with a soft brush or clean rag, or by vacuuming with soft brush attachment.
1030.3.5 Guarantee
The materials and workmanship furnished under this Item shall be guaranteed by the
acoustical contractor for a period of one (1) year from the completion date and final inspection
and accepted in writing by the Engineer. Any defective materials or workmanship shall be
replaced and corrected by the acoustical contractor.
The work commenced under this Item shall be measured the ceiling area covered in
square meters (m2) or by number of pieces.

The quantity determined shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price which price
constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals
Pay Item No. and Description Unit of Measurements
Acoustical Ceiling Panel Square meters / number of pieces
ITEM 1031 - ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
1031.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, labor, equipment and performing
all operations for all acoustical treatment requirement as shown on the Plans and in accordance

All acoustical products shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of similar materials and with a history of successful production acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
1031.2.1 Acoustical Tile/Board/Panel

Acoustical tile/board/panel shall be manufactured of non-combustible mineral fiber
having varied thickness ranging from 9.12.15 mm etc. Color, textural and physical appearance
shall be approved by the Architect/ Engineer.
1031.2.2 Sprayed-on Acoustical Material

Sprayed-on acoustical material shall be mineral fiber manufactured as acoustical
treatment for structural frames and the like.
1031.2.3 Other Materials

Other materials not specifically described but essential to complete the acoustical
treatment required shall be selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
The Contractor shall verify and examine all surfaces to be applied with acoustical
treatment and the conditions under which acoustical treatment and the conditions under which
tiles/boards/panel are to be installed and must notify all unsatisfactory conditions to the
Architect/ Engineer before any work is performed.
a) Surfaces to be applied with sprayed-on acoustical material shall be clean dry, free
from irregularities and tested for adhesive bond.
b) Ceiling T-runners or plywood backing as the case may be shall be properly aligned,
level, rigidly anchored, true to vertical height requirements.
c) Partitions, wall to be rendered acoustical treatment shall be true to details properly
plumbed and rigidly anchored.
a) Acoustical tile/board/panel shall be installed properly in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendation.
b) Anchoring of each type shall be as indicated on the Plans or as approved by the
Architect /Engineer.
c) Sprayed-on acoustical treatment on metal surfaces like structural frames, trusses and
bracing systems shall be applied at a rate and method of application recommended
by the manufacturer and as approved by the Architect/Engineer. Test on acoustics
shall be done prior to placement of sprayed-on acoustical treatment to determine the
necessity and design of the acoustical treatment.
1031.3.3 Cleaning of Surfaces

The finished surfaces shall be cleaned and must be free from any spots, dirt marks and
dust by the use of soft art gum eraser. For larger areas with larger smudges, use a chemical
treated new sponge rubber pad or wallpaper cleaner. Dust may be removed by brushing lightly
with a soft brush or clean rag, or by vacuuming with soft brush attachment.
1031.3.4 Guarantee
The materials and workmanship furnished under this Item shall be guaranteed by the
acoustical contractor for a period of one (1) year from the completion date and final inspection
and accepted in writing by the Engineer. Any defective materials or workmanship shall be
replaced and corrected by the contractor without extra cost borne to the owner.

The work commenced under this Item shall be measured the ceiling area tin square meter
or by number of pieces.

The quantity determined in sub-section 1035.4 shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price
which price constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment will be paid under:
Pay Item Description Unit of Number Measurement

1031.2.1 Acoustical tile/board/ panel m2
1031.2.2 Sprayed-on acoustical material m2
ITEM 1032 - PAINTING, VARNISHING AND OTHER RELATED WORKS
1032.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all paint materials, varnish and other related
products, labor, tools, equipment and plant required in undertaking the proper application of
painting, varnishing and related works indicated on the Plans and in accordance with this
Specification.
1032.2.1 Paint Materials

All types of paint material, varnish and other related product shall be subject to random
test as to material composition by the Bureau of Research and Standard, DPWH or the National
Institute of Science and Technology. (Use the following approved and tested brand name:
Boysen, Davies, Dutch Boy, Fuller 0 Brien, or any approved equal).
1032.2.2 Tinting Colors

Tinting colors shall be first grade quality, pigment ground in alkyd resin that disperses
and mixes easily with paint to produced the color desired. Use the same brand of paint and
tinting color to effect good paint body.
1032.2.3 Concrete Neutralizer

Concrete neutralizer shall be first grade quality concentrate diluted with clean water and
applied as surface conditioner of new interior and exterior walls thus improving paint adhesion
and durability.
1032.2.4 Silicon Water Repellant

Silicon water repellant shall be transparent water shield especially formulated to repel
rain and moisture on exterior masonry surfaces.
1032.2.5 Patching Compound

Patching compound shall be fine powder type material like calciumine that can be mixed
into putty consistency, with oil base primers and paints to fill minor surface dents and
imperfections.
1032.2.6 Varnish
Varnish shall be a homogeneous solution of resin, drying oil, drier and solvent. It shall be
extremely durable clear coating, highly resistant to wear and tear without cracking, peeling,
whitening, spotting, etc. with minimum loss of gloss for a maximum period of time.
1032.2.7 Lacquer
Lacquer shall be any type of organic coating that dries rapidly and solely by evaporation
of the solvent. Typical solvent are acetates, alcohols and ketones. Although lacquers were
generally based on nitrocellulose, manufacturers currently use, vinyl resins, plasticizers and
reacted drying oils to improve adhesion and elasticity.
1032.2.8 Shellac
Shellac shall be a solution of refined lac resin in denatured alcohol.It dries by evaporation
of the alcohol. The resin is generally furnished in orange and bleached grades.
1032.2.9 Sanding Sealer

Sanding sealer shall be quick drying lacquer, formulated to provide quick dry, good
holdout of succeeding coats, and containing sanding agents such as zinc stearate to allow dry
sanding of sealer.
1032.2.10 Glazing Putty

Glazing putty shall be alkyd-type product for filling minor surface unevenness.
1032.2.11 Natural Wood Paste Filler

Wood paste filler shall be quality filler for filling and sealing open grain of interior wood.
It shall produce a level finish for following coats of paint varnish/lacquer and other related
products.
1032.2.12 Schedule
Exterior
a) Plain cement plastered finish to be painted -3 coats Acrylic base masonry paint
b) Concrete exposed aggregate and/or tool finish -1 coat water repellant
c) Ferrous metal -1 coat primer and 2 coats enamel pain
d) Galvanized metal -1 coat zinc chromate primer and
2 coats portland cement paint
e) Wood painted finish -3 coats oil based paint
f) Wood varnished finish -varnish water repellant
Interior
a) Plain cement plastered finish to be painted - 2 coats acrylic base masonry paint
b) Concrete exposed agreegate and/or tool finish - clean surface
c) Ferrous metal -1 coat primer and 2 coats enamel paint
d) Woodwork sea-mist -3 coats of 3 parts thinner 1 part lacquer
e) Woodwork varnish - 1st coat, of one part sanding sealer to one
part solvent 2nd coat of 2/3
sanding sealer to 1/3 solvent
f) Woodwork painted - 3 coats of oil base paint finish 109
g) Ceiling boards textured finish -1 coat oil based paint allow to dry
then patch surfaces unevenness and apply
textured paint coat
The Contractor prior to commencement of the painting, varnishing and related work shall
examine the surfaces to be applied in order not to jeopardize the quality and appearances of the
painting varnishing and related works.

All surfaces shall be in proper condition to receive the finish. Woodworks shall be hand-
sanded smooth and dusted clean. All knotholes pitch pockets or sappy portions shall be sealed
with natural wood filler. Nail holes, cracks or defects shall be carefully puttied after the first
coat, matching the color of paint.
Interior woodworks shall be sandpapered between coats. Cracks, holes of imperfections
in plaster shall be filled with patching compound and smoothed off to match adjoining surfaces.
Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be coated with concrete neutralizer and allowed to
dry before any painting primer coat is applied. When surface is dried apply first coating. Hairline
cracks and unevenness shall be patched and sealed with approved putty or patching compound.
After all defects are corrected apply the finish coats as specified on the Plans (color scheme
approved).
Metal shall be clean, dry and free from mill scale and rust. Remove all grease and oil
from surfaces. Wash unprimed galvanized metal with etching solution and allow it to dry. Where
required to prime coat surface with Red Lead Primer same shall be approved by the Engineer.
In addition the Contractor shall undertake the following:
1. Voids, cracks, nick etc. will be repaired with proper patching material and finished
flushed with surrounding surfaces.
2. Marred or damaged shop coats on metal shall be spot primed with appropriate metal
primer.
3. Painting and varnishing works shall not be commenced when it is too hot or cold.
4. Allow appropriate ventilation during application and drying period.
5. All hardware will be fitted and removed or protected prior to painting and varnishing
works.
Paints when applied by brush shall become non-fluid, thick enough to lay down as
adequate film of wet paint. Brush marks shall flaw out after application of paint.
Paints made for application by roller must be similar to brushing paint. It must be
nonstick when thinned to spraying viscosity so that it will break up easily into droplets.
Paint is atomized by high pressure pumping rather than broken up by the large volume
·of air mixed with it. These procedures change the required properties of the paint.
1032.3.3 Mixing and Thinning

At the time of application paint shall show no sign of deterioration.Paint shall be
thoroughly stirred, strained and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Paints of
different manufacture shall not be mixed together. When thinning is necessary, this may be done
immediately prior to application in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, but not in
excess of 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon of the paint.
1032.3.4 Storage
All material to be used under this Item shall be stored in a single place to be designated
by the Engineer and such place shall be kept .
neat and clean at all time. Necessary precaution to avoid fire must be observed by removing oily
rags, waste, etc. at the end of daily work.
1032.3.5 Cleaning
All cloths and cotton waste which constitute fire hazards shall be placed in metal
containers or destroyed at the end of daily works. Upon completion of the work, all staging,
scaffolding and paint containers shall be removed. Paint drips, oil, or stains on adjacent surfaces
shall be removed and the entire job left clean and acceptable to the Engineer.
1032.3.6 Workmanship in General
a) All paints shall be evenly applied. Coats shall be of proper consistency and well
brushed out so as to show a minimum of brush marks.
b) All coats shall be thoroughly dry before the succeeding coat is applied.
c) Where surfaces are not fully covered or cannot be satisfactorily finished in the
number of coats specified such preparatory coats and subsequent coats as may be
required shall be applied to attain the desired evenness of surface without extra cost
to the owner.
d) Where surface is not in proper condition to receive the coat the Engineer shall be
notified immediately. Work on the questioned portion(s) shall not start until
clearance be proceed is ordered by , the Engineer.
e) Hardware, lighting fixture and other similar items shall be removed or 'protected
during the painting varnishing and related work operations and re-installed after
completion of the work.
1032.3.7 Procedure for Sea-Mist Finish
a) Depress wood grain by steel brush and sand surface lightly.

b) Apply sanding sealer.
c) Apply two coats of industrial lacquer paint.
d) Spray last coat of industrial lacquer paint mixed with sanding sealer.
e) Apply wood paste filler thinned with turpentine or paint thinner into the wood
surface.
f) Wipe off wood paste filler immediately.
g) Spray flat or gloss lacquer whichever is specified.
1032.3.8 Procedure for Varnish Finish
a) Sand surface thoroughly.

b) Putty all cracks and other wood imperfections with wood paste filler.
c) Apply oil stain.
d) Apply lacquer sanding sealer.
e) Sand surface along the grain.
f) Spray three (3) coats of clear dead flat lacquer.
g) Polish surface coated using cloth pad.
h) Spray gloss lacquer or flat lacquer whichever is desired or specified.
1032.3.9 Procedure for Ducco Finish
a) Sand surface thoroughly.

b) Apply primer surface white or gray by brush or spray.
c) Apply lacquer spot putty in thin coat. Allow each coat for become thoroughly dry
before applying next coat.
d) Apply primer surfaces and then allow drying in two (2) hours before applying the
next coat.
e) Apply a coat of flat tone semi-gloss enamel as per color scheme submitted and
approved by the Engineer.

The areas of concrete, wood and metal surfaces applied with varnish, paint and other
related coating materials shall be measured in square meters as desired and accepted to the

The accepted work shall be paid at the unit bid price, which price and payment constitute
full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and other incidental
Payment will made under:
1032 (a) Painting works m2

1032 (b) Varnishing m2
1032 (c) Sea-mist Finish m2
1032 (d) Ducco Finish m2
1032 (e) Texture Finish m2
PART D - ELECTRICAL
ITEM 1100 - CONDUITS, BOXES & FITTINGS
1100.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of the complete conduit work
consisting of electrical conduits; conduit boxes such as junction boxes, pull boxes, utility boxes,
octagonal and square boxes;conduit fittings such as couplings, locknuts and bushings and other
electrical materials needed to complete the conduit roughing-in work of this project.

All materials shall be brand new and shall be of the approved type meeting all the
requirements of the Philippine Electrical Code and bearing the Philippine Standard Agency
(PSA) mark.
Conduits
Conduits shall be standard rigid steel, zinc coated or galvanized.Intermediate metal
conduit may be used if shown or specified on the approved Plans. PVC conduit if required shall
be Schedule 40. Enamel coated steel conduits and conduits with rough inner surfaces are not
acceptable.
Conduit Boxes
All conduit boxes shall be Code gauge steel and galvanized. Outlet boxes shall be
galvanized pressed steel of standard make. In general, outlet boxes shall be at least 100 mm
square or octagonal, 53 mm deep and 16 mm minimum gauge.
Conduit Fittings
All conduit fittings such as locknuts and bushings shall be galvanized of standard make.

All works throughout shall be executed in the best practice in a workmanlike manner by
qualified and experienced electricians under the immediate supervision of a duly licensed
Electrical Engineer.
Conduits
Conduits should be cut square with a hacksaw and reamed. Bends shall be made with the
required radius. In making bends only conduit bending apparatus will be used. The use of a pipe
tee or vise for bending conduits shall not be permitted. Conduits which have been crushed,
deformed or flattened shall not be installed. No running thread shall be allowed. Conduit runs
crossing construction joints of the building shall be provided with standard expansion fittings of
the approved type.
No conduits shall be used in any system smaller than 12 mm diameter electric trade size
nor shall have more than four (4) 9O-degree bends in anyone run and where necessary, pull
boxes shall be provided.
All ends of conduits which are left empty in cabinets and conduit boxes shall be plugged
with lead or approved pipe caps so as to prevent the entrance of white ants and dirt within the
conduit system. Pull wires shall be inserted in the empty ducts before they are closed with lead or
pipe caps and shall be left therein for future use.
On exposed work, all pipes and outlet boxes shall be secured by means of galvanized
metal clamps which shall be held in place by means of machine screws. When running over
concrete surfaces, the screws shall be held in place by means of expansion sleeves for big pipes
and rolled lead sheet for small pipes. All pipes shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the
surrounding walls. No diagonal run shall be allowed and all bends and offsets shall be avoided as
much as possible. Conduits shall be supported at 1,500 mm intervals maximum.
Conduit Boxes & Fittings

Provide conduit boxes for pulling and splicing wires and outlet boxes for installation of
wiring devices.
As a rule, provide junction boxes or pull boxes in all runs greater than 30 meters in
length, for horizontal runs. For other lengths, provide boxes as required for splices or pulling.
Pull boxes shall be installed in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
Support boxes independently of conduits entering by means of bolts, red hangers or other
suitable means.
Conduit boxes shall be installed plumb and securely fastened. They shall be set flush with
the surface of the structure in which they are installed where conduits are run concealed.
All convenience and wall switch outlet boxes for concealed conduit work shall be deep,
rectangular flush type boxes. Four-inch octagonal flush type boxes shall be used for all ceiling
light outlets and shall be of the deep type where three or more conduits connect to a single box.
Floor mounted outlet boxes required shall be waterproof type with flush brass floor plate and
brass bell nozzle.
All boxes shall be painted with antirust red lead paint after installation.
All conduits shall be fitted with approved standard galvanized bushing and locknuts
where they enter cabinets and conduit boxes.
Junction and pull boxes of code gauge steel shall be provided as indicated or as required
to facilitate the pulling of wires and cables.

The work under this Item shall be measured either by lengths, pieces, pairs, lot and set
actually placed and installed as shown on the approved Plans.

All works performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be
paid for at the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation
including labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
(1) RSC Conduit Pipe - mm dia., lenght

with couplings
(2) Locknut & Bushings pairs
(3) Condulet type pieces
(4) Conduit pipe elbow pieces
(5) Connector pieces
(6) Conduit clamp pieces
(7) PVC adapter pieces
(8) G.I Wire G.A # 14 kilos
(9) Hacksaw Blade pieces
(10) PVC Tape 19 mm dia x 18 mm rolls
(11) Rubber Tape 19 mm dia x 227g rolls
(12) PVC Solvent Cement @ 400 cc cans
(13) PVC End Ball pieces
(14) Octagonal junction boxes pieces
(15) Utility Boxes pieces
(16) Metal Pull Box pieces
(17) Square Box pieces
(18) Telephone Cabinet set
(19) Reinforced Concrete pedestal Pole lot
(20) Read Lead Point lot
(21) Wetherhead with type “F” condulet pieces
(22) Grounding Rod copperweld lenght
20 mm dia x 3 m
(23) Apitong or Approved equal pieces
creosoted wood pole
(24) Anchor Rod-mm dia pieces
(25) Anchor Log-mm dia pieces
(26) Powerload Studs with nuts pieces
1100.6 General Specifications

The work to be done under this division of specifications consists of the fabrication,
furnishing, delivery and installation, complete in all details of the electrical work, at the subject
premises and all work material's incidental to the proper completion of the installation, except
those portions of the work which are expressly stated to be 90ne by other fields. All' works shall
be done in accordance with the rules and regulations and with the specifications.
1100.7 Specifications on:
1. Lighting fixtures and lamp

All lighting fixtures and lamps are as specified and listed on lighting fixture schedule.
For fluorescent lamp, it shall be 40-watt rapid start cool-white.All fluorescent ballast
shall be 230 volt, high power factor, of good quality materials and approved by the Bureau of
Product Standards (BPS).
2. Material Requirements
All materials to be used shall conform to the BPS specification.
3. Construction Requirements
All grounding system installation shall be executed in accordance with the
approved plans.
Grounding system shall include building perimeter ground wires, ground rods,
clamps, connectors, ground wells and ground wire taps as shown in the approved design.
1100.8 Auxiliary Systems

All auxiliary systems such as telephone and intercom system, time clock system, fire
alarm system and public address/nurse's call/paging system installations shall be done in
accordance with the approved design.
All materials to be used shall conform to the Bureau of Product Standards (BPS)
specifications.
1100.9 Important requirement regarding supervision of the work and submission of certificate of
completion.
All wiring installation herein shall be done under the direct supervision of a licensed
Electrical Engineer at the expense of the Contractor. The contractor shall submit the certificate of
completion duly approved by the owner's representative.
1100.10 Test and guarantee

Upon completion of the electrical construction work, the contractor shall provide all test
equipment and personnel and to submit written copies of all test results.
The contractor shall guarantee the electrical installation are done and in accordance with
the approved plans and specifications. The contractor shall guarantee that the electrical systems
are free from' all grounds and from all defective workmanship and materials and will remain so
for a period of one year from date and acceptance of works. Any defect shall be remedied by the
Contractor at his own expense.
ITEM 1101 - WIRES AND WIRING DEVICES
1101.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of all wires and wiring devices
consisting of electric wires and cables, wall switches, convenience receptacles, heavy duty
receptables and other devices shown on the approved Plans but not mentioned in these
specifications.

Wires and cables shall be of the approved type meeting all the requirements of the
Philippine Electrical Code and bearing the PSA mark. Unless specified or indicated otherwise,
all power and lighting conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts.
All wires shall be copper, soft drawn and annealed, smooth and of cylindrical form and
shall be centrally located inside the insulation.
All wiring devices shall be standard products of reputable electrical manufacturers. Wall
switches shall be rated at least 1 OA, 250 volts and shall be spring operated, flush, tumbler type.
Duplex convenience receptacles shall be rated at least 15A, 250 volts, flush, parallel slots.
Single heavy duty receptacles shall be rated at least 20A, 250 volts. 3wire, flush, polarized type.

Conductors or wires shall not be drawn in conduits until after the cement piaster is dry
and the conduits are thoroughly cleaned and free from dirt and moisture. In drawing wires into
conduits, sufficient slack shall be allowed to permit easy connections for fixtures, switches,
receptacles and other wiring devices without the use of additional splices.
All conductors of convenience outlets and lighting branch circuit home runs shall be
wired with a minimum of 3.5 mm in size. Circuit home runs to panel boards shall not be smaller
than 3.5 mm but all home runs to panel board more than 30 meters shall not be smaller than 5.5
mm. No conductor shall be less than 2 mm in size.
All wires of 14mm and larger in size shall be connected to panels and apparatus by means
of approved type lugs or connectors of the solder less type, sufficiently large enough to enclose
all strands of the conductors and securely fastened. They shall not loosen under vibration or
normal strain.
All joints, taps and splices on wires larger than 14 mm shall be made of suitable solder
less connectors of the approved type and size.They shall be taped with rubber and PVC tapes
providing insulation not less than that of the conductors.
No splices or joints shall be permitted in either feeder or branch conductors except within
outlet boxes or accessible junction boxes or pull boxes. All joints in branch circuit wiring shall
be made mechanically and electrically secured by approved splicing devices and taped with
rubber and PVC tapes in a manner which will make their insulation as that of the conductor.
All wall switches and receptacles shall be fitted with standard Bakelite face plate covers.
Device plates for flush mounting shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with
finished wall surfaces without the use of coiled wire or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not
be permitted.Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed.
When more than one switch or device is indicated in a single location, gang plate shall be
used.

The work under this Item shall be measured either by meters, rolls, pieces, and set,
actually placed and installed as shown on the Plans.

All work performed and measured and as provided for in this Bid of Quantities shall be

(1) Electric Wire meter of rolls
(2) Single pole tumblerswitch pieces
(3) Two-gang tumbler switch pieces
(4) Three-gang tumbler switch pieces
(5) Three-way tumbler switch pieces
(6) Duplex Convenience receptacles set
(7) Heavy Duty Convenience receptacles set
(8) Standard Telephone outlet pieces
bakelite cover with 9.52 center hole
(9) Window type air conditioning pieces
outlet 3-prong polarized type
(10) Bare copper wire meters
(11) Grounding clamps for electric wires pieces
(12) Messenger wire meters
(13) Guy wire meters
(14) Vibrating Bell set
(15) Traffic light Control Panel set
(16) Traffic light metal enclosures complete set
with red and green light provided
with reflectors and 152 mm diameter vibrating bell
ITEM 1102 - POWER LOAD CENTER, SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS
1102.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing and installation of the power load center unit
substation or low voltage switchgear and distribution panel boards at the location shown or the
approved Plans complete with transformer, circuit breakers, cabinets and all accessories,
completely wired and ready for service.

All materials shall be brand new and shall be of the approved type.It shall conform to the
requirements of the Philippine Electrical Code and shall bear the Philippine Standard Agency
(PSA) mark.
Power Load Center Unit Substation

The Contractor shall furnish and install an indoor-type Power Load Center Unit
Substation at the location shown on the approved Plans if required. It shall be totally metal-
enclosed, dead front and shall consist of the following coordinated component parts:
High Voltage Primary Section:

High voltage primary incoming line section consisting of the following parts and related
accessories:
(a) One (1) Air-filled Interrupter Switch, 2-position (open-close) installed in a suitable air
filled metal enclosure and shall have sufficient interrupting capacity to carry the
electrical load. It shall be provided with key interlock with the cubicle for the power
fuses to prevent access to the fuses unless the switch is open.
(b) Three (3)-power fuses mounted in separate compartments within the switch housing
and accessible by a hinged door.
(c) One 1) set of high voltage potheads or 3-conductor cables or three single conductor
cables.
(d) Lightning arresters shall be installed at the high voltage cubicle if required.
Items (a) and (b) above could be substituted with a power circuit breaker with the correct
rating and capacity.
Transformer Section
The transformer section shall consist of a power transformer with ratings and capacities
as shown on the plans. It shall be oil liquid-filled non-flammable type and designed in
accordance with the latest applicable standards.
The transformer shall be provided with four (4 approximately 2 1/2 % rated KVA taps on
the primary winding in most cases one (1) above and three (3) below rated primary voltage and
shall be changed by means of externally gang-operated manual tap changer only when the
transformer is de-energized. Tap changing under load is acceptable if transformer has been so
designed.
The following accessories shall be provided with the transformer, namely: drain valve,
sampling device, filling connection, oil liquid level gauge, ground pad, top filter press
connection, lifting lugs, diagrammatic nameplate, relief valve, thermometer and other necessary
related accessories.
The high-voltage and low-voltage bushings and transition flange shall be properly
coordinated for field connection to the incoming line section and low voltage switchboard
section, respectively.
Low-Voltage Switchboard Section

The low-voltage switchboard shall be standard modular-unitized units, metal-built, dead
front, and safetytype construction and shall consist of the following:
(a) Switchboard Housing

The housing shall be heavy gauge steel sheet, dead front type, gray enamel finish
complete with frame supports, steel bracings, steel sheet panel boards, removable rear
plates, copper bus bars, and all other necessary accessories to insure sufficient
mechanical strength and safety. It shall be provided with grounding bolts and clamps.
(b) Secondary Metering Section
The secondary metering section shall consist of one (1) ammeter, AC, indicating
type; one (1) voltmeter, AC, indicating type, one (1) ammeter transfer switch for 3-phase;
one (1) voltmeter transfer switch for 3phase; and current transformers of suitable rating
and capacity.
The above-mentioned instruments shall be installed in one compartment above the
main breaker and shall be complete with all necessary accessories completely wired,
ready for use.
(c) Main Circuit Breaker
The main circuit breaker shall be draw-out type, manually or electrically operated
as required with ratings and capacity as shown on the approved Plans.
The main breaker shall include insulated control switch if electrically operated,
manual trip button, magnetic tripping devices, adjustable time over current protection and
instantaneous short circuit trip and all necessary accessories to insure safe and efficient
operation.
(d) Feeder Circuit Breakers
There shall be as many feeder breakers as are shown on the single line diagram or
schematic riser diagram and schedule of loads and computations on the plans. The circuit
breakers shall be draw out or molded case as required. The circuit breakers shall each
have sufficient interrupting capacity and shall be manually operated complete with trip
devices and all necessary accessories to insure safe and efficient operation. The number,
ratings, capacities of the feeder branch circuit breakers shall be as shown on the approved
Plans.
Circuit breakers shall each be of the indicating type, providing "ON" - "OFF" and
"TRIP" positions of the operating handles and shall each be provided with nameplate for
branch circuit designation. The circuit breaker shall be so designed that an overload or
short on one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
Low-Voltage' Switchgear
(For projects requiring 'low-voltage switchgear only).
The Contractor shall furnish and install low-voltage switchgear at the location
shown on the plans. It shall be metal-clad, dead front, free standing, safety type
construction and shall have copper bus bars of sufficient size, braced to resist allowable
root mean square (RMS) symmetrical short circuit stresses, and all necessary accessories.
The low-voltage switchgear shall consist of the switchgear housing, secondary
metering, main breaker and feeder branch circuitbreakers and all necessary accessories,
completely wired, ready for service.
Grounding System:
All non-current carrying metallic parts like conduits, cabinets and
equipment frames shall be properly grounded in accordance with the Philippine
Electrical Code, latest edition.
The size of the ground rods and ground wires shall be as shown on the
approved Plans. The ground resistance shall not be more than 5 ohms.
Panel boards and Cabinets

Panel boards shall conform to the schedule of panel boards as shown on the
approved Plans with respect to supply characteristics, rating of main lugs or main circuit
breaker, number and ratings and capacities of branch circuit breakers.
Panel boards shall consist of a factory completed dead front assembly mounted in
an enclosing flush type cabinet consisting of code gauge galvanized sheet steel box with
trim and door. Each door shall be provided with catch lock and two(2) keys. Panel boards
shall be provided with - directories and shall be printed to indicate load served by each
circuit.
Panel board cabinets and trims shall be suitable for the type of mounting shown
on the approved Plans. The inside and outside of panel board cabinets and trims shall be
factory painted with one rust proofing primer coat and two finish shop coats of pearl gray
enamel paint.
Main and branch circuit breakers for panel boards shall have the rating, capacity
and number of poles as shown on the approved Plans.Breakers shall be thermal magnetic
type. Multiple breaker shall be of the common trip type having a single operating handle.
For 50-ampere breaker or less, it may consist of single-pole breaker permanently
assembled at the factory into a multi-pole unit.

The Contractor shall install the Power Load Center Unit Substation or Low-Voltage
Switchgear and Panel boards at the locations shown on the approved Plans.
Standard panels and cabinets shall be used and assembled on the job. All panels shall be of dead
front construction furnished with trims for flush or surface mounting as required.

The work under this Item shall be measured either by set and pieces actually placed and
installed as shown on the approved Plans.

All works performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be

(1) Panel board (Circuit Breaker Type) set

(2) Panelboard (Safety Switch Type) set
(3) Low-Voltage Switchgear (LVS) set
complete with metering devices
and accessories
(4) Power Fuses pieces
(5) Lightning Arresters pieces
(6) Air Break Switch set
(7) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type I set
(8) Enclosed ACB NEMA Type 3R set
(9) Automatic Transfer Switch set
(10) Manual Transfer Switch pieces
without fuses
(11) Motor Controller set
PART E - MECHANICAL
ITEM 1200 - AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
1200.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installation of air conditioning, refrigeration and
ventilation systems, inclusive of necessary electrical connections, ductworks, grilles, pipes and
condensate drains and all other necessary accessories, ready for service in accordance with the
Plans and Specifications.

The types, sizes, capacities, quantities and power characteristics of the compressor,
evaporator, condenser chilled water pump and condenser water pump shall be as specified or as
shown on the Plans.
1200.2.1 Refrigerant Pipes

Refrigerant pipes shall be copper tubing, type Lor K or black steel pipe, Schedule 40 lor
size of 100 mm diameter and smaller. Pipes over 100 mm shall be black steel pipe Schedule 40.
Black steel pipe shall be standard seamless, lap-welded, or electric resistant welded for size 50
mm diameter and larger, screw type for size 38 mm diameter and smaller, fittings for copper
tubing shall be cast bronze fitting designed expressly for brazing.
1200.2.2 Pipes for Cooling Water

Chilled and condenser cooling water pipes shall be black steel pipe, Schedule 40.
Pipes and fittings for size 50 mm diameter and smaller shall be screwed type. Pipes and fittings
for size 62 mm diameter and larger shall be welded or flanged type.
1200.2.3 Pipe Insulations

Insulations shall be preformed fiberglass or its equivalent.
The insulating materials shall be covered with 100 mm x .13 mm thick polyethylene film
which shall be overlapped not less than 50 mm. Pipe insulations shall be adequately protected at
point of support by means of ' suitable metal shield to avoid damage from compression. Insulated
pipes, valves and fittings located outdoors shall be provided with metal jackets.
1200.2.4 Ductworks
Ducts shall be galvanized sheet steer' of not less than the following gages:
1. No. 26 for 300 mm wide and smaller

2. No. 24 for 350 mm to 750 mm wide

5. No. 18 for 2275 mm to 2500 mm or larger
6. For aluminum sheets use one gage higher.
Joints and stiffeners of ducts using slip joints shall be as follows:
a. 300 mm wide and smaller, without brasing

b. 325 mm to 750 mm wide, brace with 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm steel angles
c. 775 mm to 1500 mm, brace with 31 mm x 31 mm x 3 mm steel angles
d. 1525 mm up, brace with 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm steel angles
Stiffeners shall be located not more than 1200 mm from each joint.
1200.2.5 Ductwork insulation

The application insulation materials shall be rigid board made of styropor or equivalent
25 mm thick for ground and top floor, 13 mm thick for intermediate floor.
Galvanized metal bands for ducts shall be secure and spaced 300 mm minimum center to
center and corners shall be protected with galvanized metal angles.
1200.2.6 Diffusers
The type, shape, capacity, size and location shall be as shown in the Plans.
Diffusers shall be complete with frame and gasket, equalizing deflector and volume
control as indicated or specified and shall have factory-applied prime coat of paint.
Samples of supply and return air diffusers shall be submitted for approval before mass
fabrication and installation.
1200.2.7 Dampers
Dampers shall be of same materials as duct, at least one gage heavier and shall have
accessible location, complete with locking device for adjusting and locking damper in position.
Where necessary, splitters, butterflies and louvers damper deflecting vanes for control of
air volume and direction and for balancing the system shall be provided whether or not they are
indicated on the plans.
1200.2.8 Fire Damper

Main duct shall be provided with proper fire dampers of the fusible link actuated type.
Access door shall be provided in ductwork for renewal of fusible link and to reset
damper.
1200.2.9 Equivalent Foundation

Foundation shall be provided and shall conform to the recommendation of the
manufacturer of the equipment. Equipment shall be leveled on foundation by means of jacks or
steel wedges. All spaces between equipment bases and concrete foundation shall be filled with
cement mortar.
1200.2.10 Electrical Works

Power supply shall be provided by the Contractor at the pull box installed inside the
machine room and shall furnish and install the main circuit breaker and starter with suitable
ratings and capacities, conduits, wirings, fittings, devices and all other equipment and electrical
connections needed to complete the electrical installation of the system. All electrical works shall
comply with the latest edition of the Philippine Electrical Code, with the applicable ordinance of
the local government and all the rules and requirements of the local power company.

The air conditioning system shall be entirely automatic in operation and shall not require
the presence of an attendant except for periodic inspection for lubrication. All equipment and
materials shall be inspected upon delivery and shall be tested after installation. Pipings shall not
be buried, concealed, or insulated until it has been inspected, tested and approved. Walls, floors
and other parts of the building and equipment damaged by contractor in the prosecution of the
work shall be replaced as shown on the Plans.
1200.3.1 Operating Tests

Refrigerating equipment shall be tested for 8-hours per day for three consecutive days or
longer when so directed, under the supervisions of manufacturers qualified and authorized
representative, who will make necessary adjustments and instruct designated plant operating
personnel for each operation and maintenance of refrigerating equipment and controls.
Operating test of complete air conditioning system shall be 6-hours minimum for each
system. Tests of air flow, temperature and humidity shall be made to demonstrate that each
complies with the requirements of the Plans and Specifications.
1200.3.2 Guarantee and Service

All equipment, materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1)
year from date of acceptance at any time within the period of guarantee and upon notification,
the contractor shall repair and rectify the deficiencies, including replacement of parts or entire
units.
1200.3.3 Miscellaneous
The owner shall be provided with three (3) bound copies “AS BUILT” diagrams, shop
drawings, part lists, serial number and inventory of equipment including manufacturers operating
and maintenance manuals.
All standard tools and equipment shall be furnished for proper and regular maintenance
of installed equipment.
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length , square metre
actually placed and installed as shown on the Plans.
Compressor, condenser and evaporator shall be measured by set, grilles, diffusers and
valve by piece, pipe by length, duct and insulation by square metre.

All work performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be
(a) Compressor, Condenser and Evaporator set

(b) Diffuser, grilles and Valves piece
(c) Pipes length
(d) Ducts and Insulation square meter
(e) Pipe Insulation meter
ITEM 1201 – WATER PUMPING SYSTEM
1201.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installation of water pumping system, inclusive
of all pipings and pipe fitting connections, valves, controls, electrical wirings, tanks and all
accessories ready for service in accordance with the approved Plans and Specifications.
1201.2.1 Water Pump

The type, size, capacity, location, quantity and power characteristics shall be as specified
or as shown on the Plans.
1201.2.2 Overhead Tank

The tank shall be provided with manhole, cover, drain pipes, distribution pipe outlet,
overflow pipes and air vent.
Suitable float switch or electrode shall be provided in the tank to stop and start the
operation of the pump.
1201.2.3 Pneumatic Tank

Tank shall be designed for twice the maximum total dynamic pressure required and shall
have the following accessories.
a) A suitable pressure switch to stop pump if pressure required is attained.

b) Air volume control device to maintain correct air volume inside the tank.
c) Pressure relief valve should be installed on top of the tank.
d) Electrode to be connected in the motor pump control to control the water level.
e) Air compressor shall be provided for tank of 3,785 liters to maintain air pressure inside
the tank.
1201.2.4 Air Compressor

The air compressor shall be electric motor driven with sufficient capacity. The
compressor shall be V-belt driven and both motor and compressor shall have V-sheaves on their
flywheels. The compressor and motor shall be mounted on a base made of structural steel with
anchor clips drilled to permit securing to a foundation.
1201.2.5 Pipes and Fittings

All pipes and fittings shall be G.I. pipe schedule 40.
All pipings 100 mm and larger shall be welded or flanged while smaller sizes shall be
screwed.
1201.2.6 Valves
A gate valve followed by a check valve shall be placed between discharge of pump and
tank to prevent back flow of water when pump stops.
1201.2.7 Foundation
Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9 – Air Conditioning System

Refer to sub-section 1200.2.10 – Air Conditioning System

Exposed pipings shall be provided with concrete saddle or steel clamps or hangers to
secure them firmly to the building structures.
Pipe threads shall be lubricated by white lead, red lead, teflon or other approved
lubrication before tightening.
Piping supports shall be placed at 3 m interval or less.
1201.3.1 Test
Appropriate test shall be done to demonstrate that the system complies with the
requirements of the Plans and Specifications.

Refer to sub-section 1200.3.2 – Air Conditioning System.
Refer to sub-section 1200.3.3 – Air conditioning System

The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length and piece actually
placed and installed as indicated on the Plans. Equipment shall be measured by set, pipes by
length, valves and fittings by piece.
All work performed and measured and as provided for in this Bill of Quantities shall be
Item Description Unit of Measurement
(a) Pump and Water Tank set

(b) Air Compressor set
(c) Pipe length
(d) Valves and Fittings piece
ITEM 1202 – AUTOMATIC WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1202.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of Automatic Water sprinkler
System, inclusive of all pipings and pipe fittings connections, valves, controls, electrical wiring
connection and all other accessories ready for service in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications.
1202.2.1 Fire Pump

The type, size, capacity and quantity and power characteristics shall be specified or as
shown on the plans.
The fire pump shall be diesel engine driven and capable of delivering a minimum of
residual pressure of 103 kPa at the top-most and remotest sprinkler. The pump unit shall be
supplied with relief valve, gate valve, suction gauge and discharge, pressure gauge.
The diesel engine shall be designed specifically intended for an automatic water sprinkler
protection system. A drop in system pressure due to the operation of one sprinkler pressure shall
be triggered a series of automatic operations that will result in the instantaneous operation of the
engine to drive the fire pump with the aid of a battery automatic controller. The required
accessories are: tachnometer, oil pressure gauge, temperature gauge and control panel. A diesel
fuel day tank shall be provided to supply the engine for a minimum of two (2) hours running
time.
A fuel storage tank shall be asphalt coated with necessary pipings and fittings for
connection.
1202.2.2 Jockey Pump

Jockey pump shall be electric motor driven, 220V, 3-phase, 60 hertz, power connection.
The capacity to be supplied shall not be less than that indicated on the Plans.
1202.2.3 Sprinkler Head
a) Type-spray unit, pendant and upright unit

b) Flow capacity, 83 LPM per head
c) Pressure rating
1) Residual pressure – 103 kPa minimum
2) Maximum pressure – 1035 kPa
d) Temperature rating – fusing at 57.5 C to 74 C
e) Finish – chrome – pendant – chrome or brass upright
f) Pipe Thread – 13mm nominal
g) Stock of extra heads and tools required
1) Pendant and upright – 6 pcs. For 300 sprinkler, 12 pcs. for 300 to 1000 sprinkler,
24 pcs. for 1000 sprinkler above.
2) Sprinkler tongs – 2 pcs.
3) Sprinkler wrench – 2 pcs.
1202.2.4 Alarm Check Valve and Fire Alarm System
a) The alarm assembly shall be constructed and installed that any flow of water from the
sprinkler system equal to or greater than that from the single automatic head shall result in an
audible and visual signed in the vicinity of the building.
b) The alarm apparatus shall be substantially supported and so located and installed that all parts
shall be readily accessible for inspection, removal and repair.
c) The actual waterflow, through the use of a test connection, shall be employed to test the
operation of the sprinkler alarm units as a whole.
d) An approved identification sign shall be installed near the outdoor alarm device in a
conspicuous positions.
“Sprinkler Fire Alarm” when bell rings call Fire Department and Police
1202.2.5 Alarm and Supervisory System

The alarm and supervisory system of the automatic water sprinkler shall include ythe
monitoring of the following:
a) Waterflow switch at each floor of the building.

b) Fire pump and jockey pump running condition and power supplies.
c) Level of water in the reservoir
d) Control Valves
The water flow switches on each floor of the building shall be connected to the fire alarm
system and annunciator in such a manner that the operation of any sprinkler system will
activate the fire alarm system, with the location of the operating waterflow switch
simultaneously indicated in the annunciator panel.
1202.2.6 Pipes and Fittings

Pipes shall be B.I. Schedule 40. Screw fittings shall be used for inside piping. Welding
and torch cutting shall not be permitted. Piping shall be painted with red enamel paint.
1202.2.7 Siamese Twin

The siamese twin shall be 64 mm x 64 mm x 102 mm, 90 C female coupling cap and
joint lug.
1202.2.8 Pipe Hangers
Pipe hangers shall be steel bars, 3 mm minimum thickness, with corrosion protection.
a) Anchorage in concrete - expansion shield should preferably be used in a horizontal position in

the sides of concrete beams.
b) Expansion shield in vertical position. When pipes 102 mm and larger are supported entirely by
expansion shield in the vertical position, the supports shall be spaced not more than 3 m apart.
c) For pipe running through concrete beams use sleeves at least two (2) sizes larger than the
piping.
1202.2.9 Foundation Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System
12022.10 Electrical Work Refer to sub-section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System
1202.3.1 Acceptance Tests

System operation and maintenance chart shall be submitted to the Owner upon
completion of the Contract. This shall include the locations of control valves and care of the new
equipment.
Marked instructions and identification sign boards: These sign boards shall be made of
#14 gauge B.1. sheet with baked enamel finish paint and letter instructions are shown on the
Plans. Additional sign boards as may be required and riot specifie8 herewith shall be furnished at
no extra cost.Sign boards shall be mounted on the equipment or wall nearest the equipment for
easy identification and reading. Paints shall be basically gloss fire red and white.
A. Conduct of Tests - shall be by the Sprinkler System Contractor in the presence of an inspector
or Authority having jurisdiction.
B. Flushing of Underground Connections - To remove foreign materials which may have
entered. the piping during installation of same as required before sprinkler piping is connected.
C. Hydrostatic Test·
1. The Pressure - All systems, including piping shall be tested hydrostatically at not less
than 1378 kPa pressure for two (2) hours, or at 344.5 kPa in excess of the maximum
static pressure when the maximum static pressure is in excess of 1033.5 kPa. .
2. Operating Test - All control valves shall be fully closed and opened under water
pressure to insure proper operation. Use clean, non-corrosive water.
3. Fire Department Connection - Piping between the check valve in the fire department
inlet pipe and the outside connection shall be tested the same as the balance of the
system.
D. Tests of Drainage Facilities - Tests of drainage facilities shall be made while the control valve
is wide open. The main drain valve shall be opened and remain open until the system pressure
stabilizes.
E. Test Certificate - Upon completion of work, inspection and tests made by the contractor's
representative and witnessed by an owner's representative, a test certificate shall be filled out and
signed by both representative.
1202.3.2 Maintenance Service
a) The contractor shall provide free of charge, maintenance seNice of the system for a period of
at least one (1) year reckoned from the date of acceptance of the work by the Engineer.
b) Upon completion of the work and all tests, the services of one or more qualified engineers
shall be provided by the contractor for a period of not less than five (5) working days to instruct
and train the representative of the owner in the operation and maintenance of the fire protection
system.
1202.3.3 Guarantee & Service Refer to sub-section 1200.3.2, Air Conditioning System
1202.3.4 Miscellaneous Refer to sub-section 1200.3.3, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed and
installed as indicated on the Plans. Fire pump and jockey pump shall be measured by set,
sprinkler heads, valves and fittings by piece, pipes by length.
1202.5 Basis of Payment All work performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute
full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this
item.
Pay Item NumberDescriptionUnit of Measurement
a) Fire and Jockey Pumps set

b) Sprinkler llead, valves piece
and fittings Pipes
c) Pipes length
ITEM 1203 - ELECTRIC ELEVATOR
1203.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of electric elevators. inclusive of all
necessary wirings, rails, concreting of machine room floor slabs and all other accessories ready
for service in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
1203.2.1 Traction or Hydraulic Machine

The type, size, capacity, speed, quantity. location and power characteristics shall be as
specified or as shown on the Plans.
1203.2.2 Car Bodies and Platform
Car bodies shall be of furniture steel, smooth and not lighter than gage no. 14.
The car platform shall consist of structural steel frame with wood flooring so treated
against the attack of termites. The undersides of the platform shall be covered with sheet steel
which shall be treated to prevent corrosion before the wooden platform is laid.
The rubber tiles floor covering shall be not less than 3 mm thick, of approved design.
color and quality. and shall be laid in 1.5 mm thick asphalt.
The car shall be wired and fitted with a compact ceiling type electric combination fan'
and light fixture controlled by a flush type standard switch within the car. .
1203.2.3 Car Doors

The type of doors shall be specified on the project Specifications or as shown on the
Plans.
The car doors shall be provided with electric interlock designed to prevent operation of
the elevator unless all the doors are locked in the closed position or to prevent opening of any
doors when the car is not in proper position.
1203.2.4 Hoistway Entrance and Doors

All hoistway entrance shall be provided with ornamental steel furniture with furnished
trimmings of such design to match the interior of the car.
The hoistway entrar.ce shall be properly reinforced where hangers, doors control and
other fittings are to be attached.
The same electric interlock for car doors shall prevent opening of any doors when the car
is not in proper position.
The type and size of the hoistway entrance and doors shall be shown on the Plans.
1203.2.5 Counterweight and Guide Rails

Counterweight shall be of cast iron made in section properly shaped for adjusting. the
total weight, and fitted into suitable guide shoes and structural steel framing. Guides for the cars
and counterweights shall be planned steel, erected plumbed, and secured to heavy steel brackets.
Guides for the car shall have a section weighing not less than 19 kg/m and counterweight guides
shall have a section weighing not less than 12 kg/m.
The elevator and counterweight shall be fitted with guide rail lubrication, preferably of
the automatic type.
1203.2.6 Annunciator System.

An electric annunciator call system with push huttons at each entrance I on each floor
shall be provided. It shall be of the electric lamp indicating type showing "UP" and "DOWN"
calls for the intermediate landing.
1203.2.7 Hall Position Indicators

Hall position indicator shall be electric multi-lighted panel type, shall be installed at each
entrance on each floor.
1203.2.8 Car Position Indicator

A car position indicator shall be provided inside the car at the most convenient location
and visible to all passenger in the car.
1203.2.9 Operating Devices
The operating device shall consist of bank of buttons in the car numbered to correspond
to the various floor served. Button shall be placed at each floor landing to bring the car to the
floor. by momentary pressure of the respective button. An emergency stop button shall be
provided in the car to interrupt the power supply and apply the brake arid stop the car
independently of the operating device.
1203.2.10 Controlling Devices·

The controlling device shall be held inoperative until all the car doors and hoistways
doors are properly closed.
A hall time relay shall be provided to render the car inoperative from any hall button
from a predetermined period of time after the car stopped at a landing in response to a hall call.
Reverse phase relay shall be mounted in the controller conveniently loCated and easily
accessible to the operator.
1203.2.11 Foundation Refer to sub-section 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System
1203.2.12 Electrical Work Refer to sub-section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System
1203.3.1 Elevator Machine Room

The location of the machinery room and its principal dimension shall be as shown on the
Plans.
The machinery shall be properly aligned, balanced and pinned to the base plate in order
to eliminate undue vibrations.
All foundations shall be insulated from the machine room floors and other portion of the
building structure with cork board or the equivalent to minimize the transmission of vibration
and noise throughout the building structure.
12033.2 Car
An emergency exit located at the top of the car and opening outward shall be provided. It
shall be not less than 406 mm in width by 635 mm in length.
1203.3.3 Capacity, Loading and Speed

The elevator shall be capable of starting, accelerating, retarding and stopping with safety
and accuracy as to loading, in either direction, with dead and live loads ranging from no load to
full rated load, and to 33 1/3 overload. The acceleration and retardation shall be done uniformly
and smoothly as much as practicable to eliminate discomfort to passenger.
The speed variation of the elevator shall not exceed 15% plus or minus with load
variation ranging from no load to full load where variation in the power supply voltage does not
exceed 5% and the variation of current frequency does not exceed 1 %.

Refer to sub-section 1200.3.2, Air Conditioning System
The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed
and installed as shown on the Plans. Traction or Hydraulic Machine and car shall be measured by
set, Hoistway doors, counter weight, Guide rails, annunciator and hall position indicators by
piece, electrical wire and conduit by length.
1203.5 Basis of Payment All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for at the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price whichpayment shall constitute
full compensation including labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this
Item.
(a) Traction or Hydraulic set

(b) Machine and car
Heoistway doors, counter- piece
weights, Guide rails,
annunciators, and hall
position indicators
(c) Electrical Wires and Conduits length
ITEM 1204 - ELECTRIC DUMBWAITER
1204.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of electric dumbwaiters, inclusive of
all necessary wirings and other accessories ready for service in accordance with the approved
1204.2.1 Machines
Machines for dumbwaiter consisting of motor, brake, worm and gear drive supported by
ball roller bearing shall be assembled into one compact unit.
The type, size, capacity, speed, quantity, location and power characteristics shall be as
specified or as shown on the Plans.
1204.2.2 Car
a) Car shall be constructed of sheet steel with reinforced angle iron frame.
b) Metal car section shall be riveted, welded or bolted together.
c) Cars may be provided with hinged, permanent or removable steel shelves.
1204.2.3 Controls and Signals

Push button fixtures at each landing arranged for either "Call and Send" or multi-button
operation,depending upon the number of floors served, shall be installed. Each floor shall be
provided with landing board of two (2) registered push buttons, one (1) call button and one (1)
dispatch button, to enable calling and sending of the car. This push button boar.d shall be located
beside the service opening. When operating a sendingbutton, a buzzer sounds and "Car here"
lamp lighted at the receiving station to advice personnel to empty the car. The "In Use" lamp
shall be lighted and shall respond to either call or send signals.
1204.2.4 Controller
The controller shall regulate starting and stopping of dumbwaiters and shall contain
protective devices designed to prevent motor damage from possible overload or excess current.
1204.2.5 Limit Switches

Terminal limit switches which are operated automatically by car movement shall stop the
dumbwaiter at the upper and lower terminals.
1204.2.6 Door Contacts and Mechanical Locks

Door contacts and mechanical locks shall be provided on each hoistway door to prevent
dumbwaiter operation unless door is closed, and to prevent opening of doors unless car is at
landing.
1204.2.7 Electrical Work

1204.3.1 Hoistway
Hoistway shall be fully enclosed for fire protection.
1204.3.2 Machine Room

Refer to sub-section 1203.3.1 Elevator Machine Room
1204.3.3 Guarantee and Service and Miscellaneous

Refer to sub-sections 1200.3.2 & 1200.3.3, Air Conditioning System

The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, piece, length actually placed
and installed as indicated on the Plans. Machine shall be measured by set, car, door and cable by
piece, electric wires and conduits by length.

All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities sGal1 be paid
for at the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation
including labor, materials, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

(a) Machine set
(b) Car, door and cable piece
(c) Electric wires and conduits length
ITEM 1205 - OXYGEN, NITROUS OXIDE, VACUUM AND FUEL GAS SYSTEM
1205.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of oxygen, nitrous oxide, vacuum
and gas, inclusive of pipes, outlets, fittings connections, vacuum pumps and other accessories
ready for service in accordance with the approved Plans and Specifications.
1205.2.1 Oxygen Manifold

Oxygen manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged oxygen cylinders, all
connected to a common header. Each bank shall be provided with a ball type pressure check
valve, pressure regulating valve and shutoff valve.
The manifold shall be equipped with alarm system which shall provide an audio-visual
switchover warning signal. It shall also include the . necessary facilities for actuating the remote
combination switch-over and Hi-low line pressure alarm panels. The Hi and Low pressure
warning shall operate when the pressure in the main varies 20% above or below normal line of
345 kPa (50 psi). The alarm control shall include one (1) mercury tube type adjustable pressure
switch for energizing the switch over alarm circuit and one (1) double mercury tube pressure
switch for energizing the Hi-low pressure alarm circuit. A single control box shall contain
220/24 volt transformer, relays for actuating all alarm panels, an audio-visual switch over alarm
panel containing "Normal" and "Reserve Supply in Use" warning lights, a momentary switch and
automatic reset to shut-off the buzzer. .
1205.2.2 Nitrous Oxide Manifold

The nitrous oxide manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged nitrous oxide
cylinders, all connected to a common header. Each bank shall be complete with pressure
regulators, safety valve set at 483 kPa, all necessary fittings, and adapters to complete the
assembly, The audio-visual alarm shall include pressure switches, isolating valve, 220/ 24 volt
transformer and remote alarm panel, consisting of pilot light, buzzers, momentary switch for
silencing the buzzer and automatic reset relay.
1205.2.3Fuel Gas Manifold

Fuel Gas manifold shall consist of two (2) banks of fully charged gas cylinders, all
connected to a common header. Each cylinder connection shall be provided with a cylinder
valve. The manifold control shall include two (2) shut-off valve, automatic throwover manifold,
pressure regulator and relief valve.
1205.2.4 Vacuum Pumps

Vacuum pumps shall be duplex type each with a capacity to handle the total load without
loss of vacuum in the system.
The duplex vacuum pumps shall be provided with sequence master alternator to
automatically reverse the sequence of operation from single to both units in the event that one
pump can not bring the system to the desired vacuum level in the case of heavy demand.
1205.2.5 Humidifier
The humidifier shall be of jet and bubbles type which the aspirator element injects water
into stream of oxygen. The humidifier bottles shall be pliable, heat resistant and shall be
sufficiently transparent to permit the water level to be easily seen and with usable water capacity
at least 300 cc. The unit shall have integral warning whistle which operates in conjunction with a
pressure limiting valve to indicate any obstruction in the supply tubing.
1205.2.6 Vacuum Trap Bottles

Vacuum trap bottles complete with adapter connection to the vacuum outlet shall consist
of a wall bracket. cap assembly with float operated shut-off valve regulator, gauge assembly and
1.5 liters glass vacuum trap bottles for collecting fluids. The vacuum bottles shall have an
integral arm for securing the cap and bottle to the bracket. The cap shall also have a positive
sealing overflow shut-off valve fluid assembly for closing off the vacuum in the event the
collection bottles become full. The collection bottles shall have cubic centimeter graduation and
imprinted operating instructions. The vacuum regulator shall be diaphram type with regulator
mechanism and gauged housed in a simple compact case.
1205.2.7 Service Outlet

All wall outlets shall be double or triple units for the following services;
oxygen, nitrous oxide and vacuum. The outlet shall be surface mounted type with satin finish
stainless steel cover plate suitable for exposed piping system. Each service outlet shall consist of
an outlet valve with outlet thread, dust cap and chain, nameplate specifying gas service. The
safety keyed coupler shall be installed to provide a gas seal when equipment is disconnected.
1205.2.8 Pipes, Valves and Fittings

All pipings shall be of seamless type "K" hard tampered copper tubing suitable for silver
brazing except pipings for gas which shall be of B. I.
pipe Schedule 40. Joints and fittings for copper tubing shall be Cast bronze designated for
brazing. Screwed connections shall be applied with thin paste of litharge ana glycerine to the
external only. Shut-off valves shall be furnished and installed as indicated in the drawings and
shall be provided with boxes to avoid tampering.
1205.2.9 Equipment Foundation

Refer to Sub-section 1200.2.9, Air Conditioning System

Refer to Sub-section 1200.2.10, Air Conditioning System
1205.3.1 Pipes, Valves and Fittings

All pipings, tubings, valves and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease or other
combustible materials by washing in hot solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate
mixed in the proportion of 373 grams to 11.4 litre of water. Scrubbing and continuous agitation
of the parts shall be employed whenever necessa;y to remove all deposits and insure complete
cleaning. After washing, all materials shall be rinsed thoroughly with clean hot water.
All pipings shall.be spaced correctly for adequate support of all lines so that weight shall
be on the support and not on the joints. Horizontal pipings of 16 mm (5/8 inch) and larger shall
be supported 3m (10ft.) apart. For 13 mm (1/2 inch) and smaller they shall be supported 1.52 m
(5 ft.) apart. On vertical lines the support shall be one on each storey for piping 25 mm ( one
inch) and smaller, for larger piping one support for each two storey.
1205.3.2 Testing
After installation of all pipes and tubings, but prior to the installation of the service outlet,
the system shall be blown clear of moisture and foreign matters by means of water pumped
nitrogen or air. After installing the device outlet the system shall be subjected to a test pressure
of 1035.5 kPa (150 psi) by means of nitrogen or air continuously for 24 hours. This test pressure
shall be maintained after each joint has been thoroughly examined for leaks by means of soapy
water.


The work under this item shall be measured either by set, lengt~, piece actually placed
and installed as indicated in the Plans. Oxygen, nitrous oxide, gas manifold and duplex vacuum
pump shall be measured by set, humidifier vacuum trap bottles, outlet and valves by piece, pipes
by length. .

All work performed and measured and as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be
Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
a) Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide,

Gas Manifold and Duplex
Vacuum pump set
b) Humidifier, vacuum Trap
Bottle, outlets, valves piece
c) Pipes and Tubings length
ITEM 1206 - HEATING SYSTEM
1206.1 Description
This Item shall consist of fumishing and installation of Heating System, inclusive of
pipes and fittings, insulation, motor control, electrical wirings and other accessories ready for
service in accordance with the approved Plans and Specifications.
1206.2.1 Boiler
The type, size, capacity, location, quantity and power characteristics shall be as specified
or as shown on the Plans.
The boiler shall be provided with the following:
a) The combination light and heavy oil burner with regulating valve for maintaining proper air-
fuel mixture.
b) Blower complete with motor and starter c) Rotary gear type oil pump assembly & oil electric
pre-heater.
d) Control panel shall be made of metal drip proof cabinet with hinged cover, fully wired and
complete with switches, fuses, and safety devices.
e) Modultrol motor to operate air valve and fuel regulating valve.
f) Feed water pump, electric motor driven with a capacity as indicated on the Plans.
g) Condense receiver tank
h) Feed water pump control
1206.2.2 Pipings, Fittings and Valves

All piping materials shall be B. I. Schedule 40, except as otherwise specified. The size of
the fittings, pipings, valves, etc. shall not be less than those indicated on the drawings.
1206.2.3 Oil Transfer Pump

The pump shall be rotary gear type, with cast iron casing. All parts of the pump that will
be in contact with the liquid shall be made of hardened steel. The rotary pump shall be electric
motor driven capable of transferring and pumping heavy fuel from the surface fuel storage tank
outside the building to the day tank inside the boiler room at a rated capacity. The suction side of
the pump shall be provided with strainer and foot-valve.
1206.2.4 Fuel Storage Tank

The fuel storage tank shall be steel-welded construction inclusive of piping connections,
valves and fittings, pipe connection to transfer pump, overflow pipe from day tank, vent
connection, pipe drain and manhole frame. The tank shall be painted with one coat of primer and
two coats of anti-corrosive asphalt paint.
1206.2.5 Fuel Day Tank

The fuel day tank shall be made of welded steel plate and provided with hinged cover on
top, supply and overflow pipe connections, drain connection, glass column gauge and valves.
The tank shall be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of finish paints.



1206.3.1 Piping Connection
Piping connection to the equipment shall be capped or plugged during installation to keep
dirt or foreign materials out of the system.
All screwed joints shall be tapped with threads properly cut. The joints shall be made
perfectly tight with a mixture of graphite or oil applied with a brush to the pipe threads. All
flanged joints shall be face true, packed and made perfectly squared.
All horizontal run pipes shall be supported. Suspended pipes sheill have adjustable
expansion pipe hangers with bolted hinged loops and turn buckles or other approved devices.
Pipes supported from side walls shall have expansion hook plates or bracket supports spaced not
greater than 3.00 m apart. All steam and condensate pipes lines shall be insulated with 85 %
magnesia of not less than 50 mrn thick. Insulation shall be finished with interlapping white
cotton cloth tightly wound around and painted.
1206.3.2 Testing
All stearn and condensate piping installations shall be subjectd to hydrostatic test at a
pressure of not less than 1378KPa, continuously for a period of 24 hours before installation of
pipe to insure that all joints are properly connected.

The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length, and piece actually
placed and installed as indicated on the Plans. Boiler,fuel pump, storage tank and day tank
including foundation shall be measured by set, pipes by length, valves and fittings by piece.

All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for at the Unit Bid or Contract Unit Price which payment shall constitute full compensation

a) Boilers, Fuel Pump, Storage
Tank and Fuel Day Tank
including foundation set
b) Pipes length
c) Valves and Fittings pieces
ITEM 1207 - BOILER
1207.1 Description
This Item shall consist of the furnishing of all equipment, materials, tools and labor
necessary for the completion of the steam laundry in accordance with the approved plans,
Specifications general condition of the contract.

All materials and equipment shall be brand new and shall conform with the standards or
equivalent set by the Product Standard Agency, set by the Department of Trade and Industry if
such a standard has been established for tile particular type of materials and equipment to be
used.
The type, size, capacity, location, quantity and power characteristics shall be specified or
inducted on the plans.
1207.2.1 Boiler
The boiler shall be constructed with the drum electrically welded throughout, with the
front and rear fuel gas return chamber and shall be solidly mounted together with auxiliaries on a
common grated surface steel base to .form a cor;nplete structure unit. The boiler shall be fully
automatic in its operation. The boiler shall be provided complete with the following:
a) The combination light and heavy oil burner with regulating valve for maintaining proper air-
fuel mixture, primary air fan with motor, gas electric ignition system with accessories, tools and
burner accessories.
b) Blower complete with motor and starter
c) Rotary gear type oil pump assembly and oil electric pre-heater and steam final heater,'
corresponding accessories, such as viscosity and temperature control, regulating valve, trap and
lines.
d) Control panel shall be made of metal drip proof cabinet with hinged cover, fully wired and
complete with switches, fuses, safety devices, with the following features:
1) Operating Control (Steam Pressure Operated) 2) Combination control-programming devices
ane: electric combustion control.
3) Air safety switch to automatically close main fuel valve and stop burner if air supply is
interrupted.
e) Mcdultrol motor to operate air valve and fuel regulating valve, synchronized to automatically
supply burner with proper amount of air and fuel at all firing rates.
f) Feed water pump, capacity as indicated on the plans, electric motor driven and condensate
receiver tank which shall include a low water level alarm and shut-off burner device, boiler water
level regulation for feed pump, float valve in automatic and manual operation of the feed pump.
g) A water softener complete with dissolving tank, testing equipment for softened water
monitoring and water meter shall be provided for the feed water requirement of the boilers.
1207.2.2 Heat Exchanger

The tank shall be provided with manhole, drain and relief valve, thermometer tapping,
cold water inlet arranged for flanged connection located at bottom side near steam coil header
and hot water outlet arranged for flanged connection located at the top. The tank shall be
subjected to a pressure of 1033.5 kPa. The heat exchanger shall be fully insulated with glassfiber
or other approved mineral insulation of not less than 75 mm thick. The surface of the insulation
shall be fitted with metal jacket and shall be painted the same as the boiler.
The tank shall be electrically welded throughout and provided with removal steam
heating coil assembly of seamless copper tubing with both ends of each tube expanded in a
common header making each tube free to expanded and contract independently of the others.
The cover of the steam coil heads shall be provided with connection for steam inlet and
condensate outlet.
A suitable thermostatic regulating valve designed to control the temperature of the water
within the hot water tank by regulating the steam supplied to the heating coil shall be installed in
the steam supply line of the hot water storage tank.
1207.2.3 Pipings, Fittings and Valves
All piping materials shall be 8.1. Schedule 40, except as otherwise specified. The size of
the fittings, pipings, valves, etc., shall not be less than those indicated oil the drawings.
Pipings connection to the equipment shall be capped or plugged during installation to
keep dirt or foreign materials out of the system.
All screwed joints shall be tapped with threads properly cut. The joints shall be made
perfectly tight with a mixture of graphite or oil applied with a brush to the pipe threads. All
flanged joints shall be face true, packed and made perfectly squared.
All horizontal runs pipes shall be supported. Suspended pipes shall have adjustable
expansion pipe hangers with bolted hinged loops and turn buckles or other approved devices.
Pipes supported from side walls shall expansion hook plates or bracket supports spaced not
greater than 3.00 m apart. All steam, condensate and hot water pipe lines shall be insulated with
85% magnesia, perform of not less than 50mm. Insulation shall extend to cover fittings and
valves leaving only handles uninsulated. The insulation shall be finished with interlapping white
cotton cloth tightly wound around and painted.
1207.2.4 Oil Transfer Pump

The pump shall be rotary, gear type, with cast iron casing. All parts of the pump that will
be in contact with the liquid shall be made of ferrous materials. The shaft shall be made of
hardened steel. The rotary pump shall be electric motor driven capable of transferring and
pumping heavy fuel from the sub-surface fuel storage tank outside the building to the day tank
inside the boiler room at a rated capacity. The suction side of the pump shall be provided with
strainer and foot-valve. A by-pass line with a pressure relief valve shall be installed between
pump and discharge gate valve. The by-pass line shall be piped back to the fuel storage tank.
1207.2.5 Fuel Storage Tank

The fuel storage tank shall be steel-welded construction inclusive of piping connections,
valve and fittings, pipe connection to transfer pump, overflow pipe from day tank, vent
connection, capped drain and manhole. The tank shall be painted with one coat of primer and
two coats of anti-corrosive asphalt paint.
1207.2.6 Fuel Day Tank

Fuel day tank shall be made of steel plate and welded and provided with hinged cover on
top, supply and overflow pipe connections, drain connection, glass column gauge and valves.
The tank shall be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of finish paints.

Refer to Structural

Refer to Electrical
1207.3.1 Testing
a) All steam and condensate piping installation shall be subjected to hydrostatic test at a
pressure of not less than 1378 kPa, continuously for a period of 24 hours before
installation of pipe insulation to insure that all joints are properly connected.
b) All hot water pipes shall be hydrostatistically tested of not less than 689 kPa continuously
for 24 hours before installation of pipe insulation.

Refer to 1200.3.2, Air Conditioning System

The work under this Item shall be measured either by set, length, and piece actually
placed and installed as indicated on the plans.
Equipment shall be measured by set, pipes by length, valves and fittings by piece. The complete
work, as measured in accordance with this sub-item and accepted by the engineer shall be the
basis for payment.

All work performed and measured as provided for in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for at the Unit Bid or Contract l,)nit-.Price which payment shall constitute full compensation

(a) Steam Boilers, Air set
Compressor, Heat
Exchanger & Fuel Pump
(b) Pipes with insulation length
(c) Values & Fittings piece
DIVISION III - PORTS AND HARBORS
PART F - PILING
ITEM 1300 - PILING TO INCLUDE SHEET PILING
1300.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, driving, splicing and cutting all of foundation piles
in accordance with these specifications and where shown on the plans or as designated by the
Engineer.
The requirements herein are minimum. Strict compliance with these minimum
requirements will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for adopting whatever
additional provisions may be necessary to insure the successful completion of the work.
1300.2 Material Requirement

The kind and type of piles shall be as shown on the plans and called for in the proposal.
No alternate types or kinds of piles, except that shown on the plans shall be used. The pile shall
conform to the following requirements.
1300.2.1 Untreated Timber Piles

The kind of timber used shall be as shown on the plans.
All timber piles shall be cut from the trunks of sound live trees, closegrained, solid, free
from defects such as injuries. ring shakes, large and unsound loose knots, decay, insect attacks or
other defects which will materially affect its strength. Sound knots will be permitted provided the
diameter of a knot does not exceed 10 centimeters, or one-third the diameter of the pile at the
point where it occurs.
Round piles shall becut above the ground swell and shall taper from butt to tip. A line
drawn from the center of the tip to the center of the butt shall not fall outside of the cross-
sectional center of the pile at any point more than 1 percent of the length of the pile. Piles shall
be cut square at the ends with its butt and tip diameters with length not less than those called for
in the specifications or in the plans.
In short bends, the distance from the center of the pile to a line stretched from the center
of the pile above the bend to the center of the pile below the bend shall not exceed 4 percent of
the length of the bend or a maximum of 6A centimeters.
Unless otherwise specified, all pilesshall be peeled removing all the rough bark and at least 80
percent of the inner bark. Not less than 80 percent of the suriace on any circumference shall be
clean wood. No strip of inner bark remaining in the pile shall be over 2 centimeters wide and 20
centimeters long. All knots shall be trimmed close to the body of the pile.
The pile sizes, shall conform to the dimensions shown on the following table:
Diameter (1 Meter
Length of Pile from the butt) Minimum Tip
Minimum Maximum Diameter (cm)
(cm) (cm)
Under 12 m 30 45 20
12 to 18 m 32 45 18
Over 18 m 35 50 15
The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled condition. When the pile is not
exactly round, the average of three measurements may be used. For any structure the butt
diameter for the same length of pile shall be as uniform as possible.
Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the plans. The kind of group of the
timber piles shall be specified. It shall be understood that any question arising between the
government and the contractor with regards to the meaning of the kind of timber called for in the
plans or specifications or actually furnished, the decision of the director of Forestry, or his
authorized representative shall be final and binding.
1300.2.2 Treated Timber Piles
All creosoted timber piles shall be "Apitong" (Dipterocarpus Grandiflorus) as called for
on the plans and shall conform to the corresponding requirements for untreated timber piling.
The wood shall be impregnated by the "Full Cell" process in accordance with ASTM D 1760 and
AASHTO M 133, with minimum eighty (80) Pascals of creosoted retained on the timber. The
minimum penetration of the preservative into the timber shall be 2 mm. The actual creosoting of
the timber in the plants shall be subjected to inspection of the Engineer.
The creosote to be used for all timber pile shall conform approximately to the formula
adopted by the American Wood Preserving Association of the United States of America. The
Contractor shall submit a certification from the creosoting plant that the pile delivered were
im;:Jregnated by the "Full Cell" process with approximately eighty (80) Pascals of creosoted
retained on the timbers and that the minimum penetration of the creosote shall not be less than 20
mm.
1300.2.3 Steel Piles

Steel piles are built-up or steel sections usually H-shape with wide flanges designed
particularly for piling purposes, and shall be of the section shown on the plans and shall conform
to Item 402.2.6' of Volume II (Blue Book).
Steel piles when loaded, shall conform to the camber and sweep permitted by allowable
mill tolerance. Piles that are bent or otherwise injured will be rejected.
1300.2.7 Prestressed Concrete Piles

Prestressed concrete pile shall be constructed as shown on the plans and in accordance
with Item 406, Part F of Volume II, Blue Book. Strands for prestressing shall be as specified in
the same Item including curing and stripping of formwork.
1300.2.8 Pile Shoes

Pile shoes, when required shall be of the approved design as called for on the plans. For
concrete piles, the pile shoes shall consist of structural steel angles, and/or steel plate with a sizes
and dimensions shown on the plan and welded to mild steel reinforcement for embedment into
the concrete. For tubular piles, pile shoes shall consist of 'chilled hardened" high duty cast iron of
clean gray tough metal, free from sand, honeycorGb, air holes, or other defects, or of forged steel
nosing. The cast iron or forged steel nosing shall be welded to the tubular pile or pile shell.
1300.3 Construction Method
The Contractor shall submit with his tender details of his proposed pile driving
equipment and methods.
1300.3.1 Equipment, Location and Site Preparation

The pile driving equipment shall include the piling frame, hammer, helmet and packing
with full information of the method of handling and pitching piles and supporting them during
driving, and of the proposed driving procedure to give penetration to the required level and of the
proposed set for the working load on the pile and the method of calculating it.
For building foundation on land, all excavations of the foundation in which the piles are
to be driven as shown on the plans shall be completed before the driving is began. After driving
is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall be removed from around the piles, leaving
clean solid suriace to receive the concrete coping.
For marine works, the piles shall be driven in properly staked positions with square holes
after the site have been cleared or obstructions have had been removed or the required dredging
had been completed. Driving may be executed with a floating plant, on falsework or with the use
of any existing landing structure.
1300.3.2 Length of Pile

The length of the rest of the piles to be used for the structure shall be based upon the
result of the test piles previously conducted in accordance with Item 1301 "Test Piles". The
contractor and the Engineer will on the result of the test piling, mutually determine the length of
the pile to be fabricated. The length to be adopted shall however be subject to the prior writ1en
approval of the Engineer. The foregoing not withstanding, the piles may be spliced and redriven,
if the piles will not develop the required bearing power after having been driven to the
penetration as determined from the test pile and/or test load. On the other hand, piles not driven
to the required penetration referred to herein but which have developed the required bearing
power may be accepted if no penetration was obtained with the aid of proper jetting or drilling.
1300.3.3 Driving Piles

All piles shall be driven at locations previously determined on the y.
site based on the plans. Any type of hammer to be used prior to the construction shall require the
Engineers approval in writing.
Gravity hammer may be used for driving timber piles. Any gravity hammer permitted
shall weigh not less than one-half of the weight of the pile to be driven but in no case less than
907 kg for pile weighing 1814 kg. or less. The fall shall be regulated so as to avoid injury to the
pile and in no case shall exceed 6 meters.
Concrete and steel piles shall be driven with a steam hammer or a diesel hammer which
shall develop an energy per blow at each full stroke of the piston of not less than 831.48 kg.m for
each cubic metre of concrete.
1300.3.4 Pile Leads

Pile driver leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford freedom of movement
of the hammer and they can be held in position by supports or braces to insure steady position of
the pile during driving,
The driving of piles with followers shall be avoided, as much as possible and may be
done only under written permission of the Engineer.
1300,3.5 Protection of Pile Heads

When the nature of the driving is such as to unduly injure the piles, the head thereof shall
be protected with a proper cap of approved design preferably consisting of rope or wooden
blocks. The cap shall be provided on the head of the pile, and should fit the base of the follower.
When the area of the head of the pile is larger than that of the driving part of the hammer, a
suitable cap shall be provided to distribute the blow over the entire section of the pile and thus
minimized any tendency to shatter the pile.
Every timber pile shall be provided with a metal collar to prevent brooming, except when
the head is fitted into a steel block.
1300.3.6 Driving of Piles

Pile shall be driven with a variation of not more than 2 centimeters per metre from the
vertical or from the batter shown on the plan except that piles for trestle bents shall be so driven
that the cap may be placed in its proper location without inducing excessive stresses in the pile. :
Procedure incident to the driving of piles shall not subject them to excessive or undue
abuse producing crushing or spalling of the concrete injuries splitting, splintering or brooming of
the wood, or deformation of the steel. Manipulation of piles to lorce them into proper position
considered by the Engineer to be excessive will not be permitted. Any pile damaged by reason of
internal defects, or by improper driving, or driven out of its proper location or driven below the
elevation fixed by the plans or by the Engineer shall be corrected at the contractor expense by
one of the following methods:
a) The pile shall be withdrawn and replaced by a new and if necessary a longer pile
b)A second pile shall be driven adjacent to the defective pile.
c) The pile shall be spliced or built-up as otherwise provided.
No timber pile shall be spliced without specific permission of the Engineer. 11 allowed
the top portion of the splice shall have a minimum distance of 2.50 metres below the ground line
or sea bed.
It is expected that all piles shall be driven to the full length shown on the plans and as determined
by the test piles.
a) If the required capacity of the piles can not be obtained, the Contractor shall without
delay report to the Engineer for indication.
b) When it has become impossible to drive the pile before the specified depth is reached, the
Contractor shall investigate the cause and report to the Engineer and shall not cut-off the piles
without the Engineer's permission.
c) In case piles refuse to penetrate to the specified depth, the following procedure may be
resorted to:
1) Jetting: Water jets may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. This is done by
displacing soil at the pile tip by means of one or more jets discharging a proper volume of water
under sufficient pressure to allow the discharge to come up to ground surface around the pile.
Water pressure in sand should be from 276 kPa to 414 kPa and in gravel from 690 kPa to 1035
kPa. Jet pipes can usually be pushed into the ground by hand.
Moving the pipe up and down will give a lubricating effect. It maybe necessary to put the two
jets down first on one opposite side and then on the other opposite sides. Before the desired
penetration is reached, the jet shall be removed at least one metre short of the minimum required
penetration under normal driving operations.
2) Drilling: When it has been satisfactorily demonstrated to the Engineer that the piles
cannot be driven in the regular manner or by use of water jets undersized pilot hole maybe
drilled below the pile tip to facilitate the driving.
When drilling is permitted, the pilot hole drilled shall have a diameter not more than 75%
of the cross section of the driven pile and the drilling shall continue only through the strata of
hard material obstructing the driving. The Contractor shall make every effort to provide a stable
hole of uniform diameter in order to avoid losing the soil-pile friction along the length of the
pilot hole. Before the desired penetration is reached, the drill shall be removed at least one meter
short of the minimum specified penetration and the pile shall be finally set under normal driving
operations.
All piles shall be driven to levels determined by the Engineer as driving of the group of
piles proceed and, in addition, all bearing piles shall have achieved the required penetration and
bearing which indicate that they are capable of carrying with factor of safety of two at least the
bearing capacity indicated on the drawings.
A detailed record of driving of all piles shall be furnished by the Contractor and given to
the Engineer daily and he shall give every assistance to the Engineer tei enable him to check
measurements during the progress of the work.
1300.3.7 Bearing Power of Pile

Each pile shall be driven until it develops the bearing power indicated on the plans, as
determined by the following "Engineering News" formulas
a) For drop hammer where the weight of the ram shall not be less than one-half (1/2) the weight
of the pile:
L=____200 km___
12c + 9P
K
b) For single-acting steam hammer, where hammer is free to fall without aid of steam pressure in
cylinder:
L=____200 km___
12c + 9P
K
c) For double~acting steam hammer, where steam is acting against piston in forcing hammer
down:
L = 200(K + ap)m
12c + 3P
K
Where:
L - safe bearing power, in kilograms;

K - weight of hammer ram, in kilograms (ram is the moving' part of the steam hammer)
P- Weight of pile including driving head and follower in kilograms
m - free fall of hammer, in metres
c - average penetration under last six (6) blows in centimeters;
a - effective area of the piston per square centimeter; and
p - steam pressure, in kilograms per square centimeters
d) For diesel hammer, appropriate formula to be used in computing for the bearing power
shall be submitted to the office of the Engineer for approval.
In case water jets are used in connection with the driving, the bearing power shall be
determined by the above formulas from the results of driving after the jets have been withdrawn.
When driving is interrupted before final penetration is reached, or when splicing is made,
the record for penetration shall not be taken until af1er at least 30 centimeters penetration has
been obtained on resumption of driving,
1300.3.8Inspection of Tubular Piles

At all times prior to the placing of concrete and reinforcement in the driven tubular piles
the contractor shall have available a suitable light for the inspection of each shell throughout its
entire length, Any improperly driven, broken or otherwise defective shall be corrected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, by removal and placement or the driving of an additional pile at no
extra cost to the government.
1300.3.9 Extension or Build-ups

Extension, splice or "build-ups" of piles when necessary shall be made as follows:
a) Timber Piles - when necessary, the splice shall be made according to detail furnished by the
Engineer, Fish plates or pipe splices are allowed however it is required that the top of the splice
shall be at least 2.50 metres below the sea bed af1er driving.
b) Structural Steel Pile - Structural steel piles shall be spliced by welding, using splice plate
when necessary.
c) Tubular Steel Pile - Sections of tubular piles shall be joined by telescopic sections and lap
welded for full penetration or by means of butt welding of uniform sections continuous
throughout the joint.
d) Precast Concrete Piles - Af1er the driving is completed, the concrete at the end of thepile shall
be cut away, leaving the reinforcing steel exposed for a length of 1.00 metre. The final cut of the
concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pile. Reinforcement similar to that used in the
pile shall be securely fastened to the projecting steel and the necessary formwork shall be placed,
care being taken to prevent leakage along the pile. The concrete shall be of the same quality as
that used in the pile. Just prior to the placing of concrete, the top of the pile shall be thoroughly
wetted and covered with a thin coating of neat cement. The forms shall be lef1 in place for not
less than 7 days and shall then be carefully removed and the entire exposed suriace of the pile
shall be given an ordinary suriace finish.
1300.3.10 Cutting Off and Capping Piles

All piles shall be cut off square at the required elevations. Tops of foundation pile shall
be embedded in the concrete footing by at least 0.30 metres or as shown on the plans.
If capping is required,the connections shall be made according to details shown on the
plans. The required embedment of the steel shall extend into the pile cap.
1300.3.11 Protecting Heads of Piles
a) The heads of untreated piles in footing shall be cut-square and below the lowest ground
elevation.
b) For heads of treated piles in marine works, the cuts and abrasions, after having been carefully
trimmed, shall be coated with at least three applications of hot creosoted oil and covered with hot
asphalt or roofing pitch. Before bolts are driven all holes shall be impregnated with hot creosote
oil.
Treated piles shall be handled carefully. They shall not be dropped suddenly,outer fibers
shall not be broken and then surface shall not be bruised or penetrated by tools.
c) When steel piles or tubular piles extended above the ground surface or water surface, they
shall be protected by two coats of epoxy coal tar. If concrete jacket is required a minimum
thickness of .15 m shall be used. These protection shall extend 1.00 m below the water elevation
on finished ground to the top of the exposed steel.
For supply, the quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of lineal metres of pile
shown on the plans or ordered from a list approved in writing by the Engineer based on the
results of the Pile driving of the test piles.
For driving, the quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of lineal metres of
piles driven and accepted measured from the tip of the pile to the ground surface. Defective piles
on piles driven outside the allowable tolerance as to location shall not be measured for payment
but shall be replaced in kind. Piles shoes, and accessories for splicing shall not be measuredbut
shall be considered already included in the measurements of lengths for the supply and splicing
which ever is the case.

The quantities of piling left in place in theaccepted structure measured as provided above
shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per linear metre for "Piling" of the particular type
called for in the proposal.
Cut-offs measured as provided above shall be paid for at a unit price per linear metre base
on the cost of supply. Cutting-off shall be deemed included in the cost.
Splicing shall not be paid for, but the length of splicing shall be paid for in linear metres
as required by the Engineer.
Payment for tubular piles left in place shall include the cost of the concrete core of Class
A concrete including the steel reinforcement of the said concrete core.
All the above price and payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment, tools, fuel, welding if needed and other incidental expenses to
complete the Item.
Measurement
1300.1 a. Untreated Timber pile Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.2a. Treated Timber piles, Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.3a. Steel Pipes Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.4a. Tubular Steel Piles. Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.5a. Concrete Piles, Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
1300.6a. Prestressed Conc. Piles, Supply linear metre
b. “ Drive “
c. “ Splice “
ITEM 1301 - TEST PILE
1·301.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, driving, including splicing or cutting off of test
piles or piles in accordance with these specification at locations shown on the plans or as
designated by the Engineer.

The kind and type of pile or piles shall be as shown on the plans and shall be of the same
kind and type as the rest of the piles of the same structure. These pile shall be of greater length or
two metres longer that the length assumed in the design in order to provide for any variation in
soil conditions that will require deeper penetration. The piles shall conform to the reqUirements
specified for each kind and types of pile unoer clause 1300.2 "Material Requirement" of Item
1300 "Piling Work".
1301.3 Construction Method

The contractor shall have submitted with his tender, details of his proposed pil~ driving
equipment and methods for driving the test pile or piles. Driving test pile shall be performed with
the same type of pile driver to be used in the permanent works. The procedure shall be as
described in clause 1300.3 "Construction Methods" of Item 1300 "Piling Work". The contractor
shall fabricate the test pile or piles to the specified length by the Engineer and shall be driven in
the position shown on the Plans or selected by the Engineer. such that it shall become an integral
pan of the structure.
The contractor shall furnish the Engineer with detailed record of the driving of the test
pile throughout the full depth of driving and after attaining the required penetration, driving shall
be continued until refusal or until the Engineer directs that it shall stop. Driving beyond the point
at which the required penetration is obtained may be called for to demonstrate that driving
resistance continue to increase.
When refusal is attained, without the required penetration, while the butt of the pile is
still above the required elevation, jetting or drilling shall be resorted to as prescribed in Item
1300, "Piling Works". If found necessary, this pile shall be spliced and re-driven until the
bearing power attained is to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Test piles, whether or not utilized as foundation pile in the structure will be measured in
linear meter shown on the plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer. Splicing or build-up
shall be paid for at the unit price bid under Item 1300 "Piling Works". Cut-off to the required
elevation are already included in the units of quantity measurement.

Test piles whether driven or not to the required penetration and bearing, including jetting
or drilling if necessary shall be paid in linear meter and size specified, driven and accepted. Cut-
off are included except splicing which shall be paid at the contract unit price for splicing for the
kind and type of piling under Item 1300 "Piling Works". This payment shall include that cost of
materials, labor, equipment, tools, fuel, cutting and accessories needed to' complete the item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
1301 (a) Untreated timber

test pile butt
diameter
Length _____________________Linear metre
1301 (b) Treated timber
test pile butt
diameter
1301 (c) Steel test piles
size
1301 (d) Concrete Test
pile
1301 (e) Tubular test
pile size
Length_____________________Linear metre
PART G - PROTECTIVE WORKS AND ACCESSORIES
ITEM 1400 - MOORING FIXTURES
1400.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, installing and painting of all types of mooring
fixtures at locations as shown on the plans and required by this specification.
1400.2 Materials
The materials shall be tough gray cast iron and casting shall conform to the details
shown on the plans and shall be true to pattern. The finished product shall be out of wind, free
from flood and excessive shrinkage.
Fixing devices such as anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-zinc coated-steel fabricated
from steel with minimum tensile strength of 37 kg/ mm2.
Items called for maybe the following:
(a) Mooring Cleat - Weighing approximately 75 kilos each with two 31.75 mm diameter
standard bolts with standard 38.1 mm diameter G.I. pipe and ogee washer. Length of
bolts and G.I. pipe depends on the thickness of the concrete slab or timber dock
where the fixture is to be located.
(b) Mooring Post - Weighing approximately 50 kilos each with 4 pieces of 31.75 mm
diameter x 60 cm swedge bolts with 7.5 cm threaded end and swedge of 12.7 mm
long by 6.35 mm deep spaced @ 10 cm on centers and staggered 1/4 of the
circumference from the preceeding swedge, so that on each of the four sides of the
bolt the swedge will be 40 cm apart.
(c) Mooring Bitt - Weighing approximately 405 kilos with four 38.1 mm diameter
swedge bolts by 90 cm long. The swedge anchor bolt shall be threaded for a length of
15 cm at one end. The swedge on the bolt shall be 19 mm long by 9.5 mm deep space
@ 15 cm on centers starting 7.5 cm from the end of the threaded portion, and
staggered around the bolt at a distance of 1/4 of the circumference from preceeding
swedge so that on each of the lour sides of the bolt the swedge will be 60 cm apart.
(d) Mooring Bollard - Weighing approximately 930 kilos with four 50.8 mm diameter x
1.30 m long swedge bolts, threaded 15 cm at one end. The swedge on the bolts shall
be 19 mm long by 9.5 mm deep spaced every 15 cm on centers starting 15 cm from
the threaded portion and staggered at 1/4 the circumference from the preceeding
swedge so that on each of the four sides of the bolt the swedges will be 60 cm apart.

Mooring fixtures shall be placed as per plan.
For mooring cleat, tile pipe with length equal to the thickness of the slab shall be
embedded into the concrete at location indicated on the plans. For timber decks, holes larger than
the bolt shall be drilled. The head of the bolts shall fit the socket on the mooring fixtures and the
ogee washer shall be placed at the bottom before placing the nut.
For mooring post installation on concrete, the swedge bolt, fixed on a template may be
embedded in the new concrete. For installation on timber decks, bolts with ogee washer shall be
used.
For mooring bitt or bollard, cored holes 88.9 mm diameter shall be provided in the
concrete for the achor bolts as called for on the plans.The bolts shall be carefully centered and
granted in the holes, extending 9.5 mm above the top of the cast iron based in final position, by
the aid of a template made to conform in each case to the base of the particular mooring
bitt/bollard to be placed.Prior to placing the mooring fixtures, the concrete bed shall be
roughened and the exposed threaded end of bolts shall be scrubbed with gasoline and fluxed with
muriatic acid, which shall then be neutralized with hot water and soda solution. The inside of the
bolt holes in the base of the mooring bitt/bollard shall be cleaned in the same manner. The
mooring bitt/bollard shall then be placed in position plumb and at precise spacing over the bolts
on a layer of stiff one to two (1 :2) cement mortar 6.5 mm in thickness. After this mortar bed has
set any mortar forced up into the bolt holes shall be carefully removed and the hol~ threads again
cleaned with cotton waste, dampened with acid and neutralized as above described. The threads
and holes shall then be protected until ready for zincing.
Zinc shall be applied to the bolt holes of the bitt/bollard in the following manner: A dam
of clay 8.9 ems in diameter shall be built on the base around each bolt. Molten zinc shall then be
prepared and the bolt and hole shall then be heated with a blow torch to prevent the zinc from
hardening prematurely. The molten zinc shall then be poured in one continuous operation for
each bolt head, so as to cover the top of the bolt to a thickness of about 6.5 mm. After the zinc
has hardened, the holes shall be smoothly rounded off to a quarter circle.
For replacement only of damaged mooring bitt/bollard, the zinc shall be molten by
heating with blow torch and removed the remaining portion of the mooring fixtures shall be
lifted from the bolts and concrete bedding.
The old concrete bedding shall be removed and the above procedure for installation of new
mooring fixture shall be followed.
Painting-The surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with two coats of coled
applied chip resistant tar with bitumen. Bolt recesses if any are to be filled up with an approved
mastic sealing compound.
1400.4 Method of Measurement The number of sets of mooring fixtures (cleats, post, bitt and
bollard) supplied, installed, painted and accepted shall be the basis for measurement.
1400.5 Basis of payment The number of sets of mooring fixtures (cleats, post, bitt and ballard)
determined as provided above at the contract unit price for new fixtures which include the
accessories.
For replacement, the number of mooring fixtures reconstructed shall be determined and
paid for at the contract unit prices for supply of new fixtures without accessories. Such prices
and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, for
turning over to the Engineer all waste or damages fixtures and for all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the item.

Measurement
1400.1 (a) Cleat w/ accessories each set

(b) Post w/ accessories each set
(c) Bitt w/ accessories each set
(d) Bollard w/ accessories each set
1400.2 (a) Cleat (Replacement) each
(b) Post (Replacement) each
(c) Bitt (Replacement) each
(d) Bollard (Replacement) each
ITEM 1401 - TIMBER WALING
1401.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, fabricating and installing of timber waling, as
shown on the plans, of Yacal or Ipil placed and fixed by .
bolts on the edges of landings for the purpose of preventing the vessels or ships from getting in
direct contact with the structure.
1401.2 Materials
Timber waling shall be yacal or ipil, thoroughly seasoned or dried, sound, straight, free of
splits shakes, decays and knots and other defects.
Walings shall be sawn square and true to dimensions shown on the plans.
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be of galvanized steel.

Yacal or Ipil waling shall be placed along the edge of the wharf or pier as shown on the
plans and secured in placed by means of one 25.4 mm ¢ bolt set in 31.75 mm ¢ galvanized iron
pipe embedded in the concrete and spaced as shown on the plans. The nuts and ogee washers for
the bolts shall be countersunk in the timber so that no portion of the bolt or nut shall be within 25
mm of the outer surface of the timber, and the holes shall be placed with hard asphalt. Likewise,
the bolt heads,with standard cut washers, shall be countersunk in the concrete curb, and the holes
placed with hard asphalt of the same grade. The timber waling shall be lap-joined. The centerline
of the bolts attaching the wall to thecurb. All timber waling shall be painted with two coats of hot
tar, the second coat to be applied immediately before contact is made with the concrete.

The quantity of walings to be paid for shall be the length in linear meters of timber
walings supplied, fabricated, installed, painted and accepted in the final work.
1401.5 Basis of payment

The total length of the walings in linear meters as determined above shall be paid for at
the unit contract price in the proposal. The unit price shall be considered to include all materials,
fabricating, installation and painting and all other incidental work.
1401.1 Timber Waling Linear meter
ITEM 1402 - FENDER CLUSTERS AND DOLPHINS

1402.1 Description
This item shall consist of the furnishing, driving, cutting off and bending of piles in
clusters, provided with rubbing timber or rubber dock fenders in accordance with these
specifications and where shown on the plans or as designated by the Engineer.
The requirements herein are minimum, strict compliance with these minimum
requirements will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for adopting whatever
additional provisions maybe necessary to ensure the successful completion of the work.

The kind andtype of piles shall be as shown on the plans and called for in the proposal.
Pilings maybe either Creosoted Apitong, Reinforced Concrete, Steel or Tubular Piles and shall
be in accordance with Section 1300.2 Materials of Item 1300 Piling Works.
For timber piles; binding shall be galvanized steel wire cables with galvanized staples
and gage 24 G.1. sheet caps.
For concrete piles, reinforced concrete capping shall be used as binder.
For tubular piles, galvanized structural shapes or angles shall be used for framing and
welded to the tubular piles.
For rubbing timber used Yacal or Ipil, 250 mm x 250 mm, secured by Galvanized bolts
and galvanized lag screws.
All Rubber Dock Fenders shall be in accordance with Item 1403 Rubber Dock Fenders.

The Concrete and Tubular Fender Piles (Rigid Type) should be driven to a penetration
sufficient to develop the required compression or tension in the piles. Piles may be vertical or
with slope as shown on the plans.
For Timber piles (flexible type), the binding shall be as follows:
3-pile cluster -5 turns of 16 mm ¢ galvanized steel wire

cable
-all pile batter
-one rubbing timber secured by 20 mm₵
bolts and 20 mm₵ x 250 mm lag screws
spaced @ 0.70 O.C.
4-pile cluster -5 turns of 16 mm ₵ galvanized steel wire

cable
-two piles vertical, 2 piles batter
-2 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm ₵
bolts and 20 mm ₵x 250 mm lag screws
spaced at 0.70 O.C.
5-pile cluster -5 turns of 20 mm ₵ galvanized steel wire

cable
-two piles vertical, 3 piles batter
- 2 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm ₵
bolts and 20 mm ₵ x 250 mm lag screws
spaced at 0.70 O.C.
7 -pile cluster -8 turns of 20 mm ₵ galvanized steel wire

Cable
- 3 piles vertical, 4 piles batter
-2 rubbing timber secured by 20 mm ₵
spaced at 0.70 O.C.
9-pile cluster -10 turns of 25 mm ₵ steel wire cable

- 4 piles vertical, 5 piles batter
spaced at 0.70 O.C.
12-pile cluster -10 turns of 25 mm ₵ galvanized steelwire

cable
-5 piles vertical, 7 piles batter
spaced at 0.70 O.C
The timber pile should be driven to a penetration below sea bed of about one third (1/3)
of the respective length. This penetration may be increased or decreased by a.bout one or two
meters depending upon the nature of the material encountered.
Balter piles slope approximately 1 :6. Bind the pile clusters with galvanized steel wire
cable which should be secured to every pile in contact with galvanized staples, ends of cables to
be looped securely fastened.
Top of the pile and cables after cutiing and placing respectively shall be treated with two
thick coats of hot tar, before placing metal cap.
Paint with one coat of tar the cap after it is placed.

Fender Clusters and Dolphins shall be measured by the number of units with
corresponding number of piles installed and completed with rubbing timber or rubber dock
fenders and accepted. For rigid type the actual penetration of the pile (R.C. & Tubular steel) to
the required bearing shall be determined and the increase or decrease in pile length shall be
measured by the lineal meters.

The number of sets of fender clusters or dolphins, installed, completed with the required
number of rubbing timber or rubber dock fenders, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
set with the specified number of pile per cluster, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for all falsework, form driving, placing and finishes and for all materials, labor,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the item. The cost per set may be increased or
decreased depending on the result of driving of the R.C. or Tubular Steel Piles.
Pay Item No. & Name Unit of Measurement
1402.1 3 Pile /set

.2 4 Pile /set
.3 5 Pile /set
.4 7 Pile /set
.5 9 Pile /set
.6 12 Pile /set
1402.7 Concrete Dolphin

(a) Increase in length of pile /set
(b) Decrease in length of pile /I.m.
.8 Tubular Steel Dolphin ./set
(a) Increase in length of pile . /set
(b) Decrease in length of pile /I.m.
ITEM 1403 - RUBBER DOCK FENDERS
1403.1 Description
This pay item shall consist of special approved type of quality of unused natural or
synthetic rubber by extrussion process.

Rubber Dock Fenders shall be extruded natural rubber strong durable, highly resistant to
weather, salt water and abrasion. These pay item shall be homogenous throughout, free from
impurities, pored or weak sections, cracks, tats bubbles and other defects detrimental to the
services where they are intended.
This pay item shall be installed as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

The amount to be paid for shall be the actual number of sets of Rubber Dock Fenders
installed or placed of special quality as specified, accepted and finished.

The number of sets of Rubber Dock Fenders as stated above, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price per sets installed. The price and payment thereof shall constitute to the full
compensation for installation of the rubber dock fenders in-place, and for all labor, materials,
equipment or tools and other incidentals necessary to complete this pay-item.
Pay Item No. and Description Unit of Measurement
Inst. of Rubber Dock Fenders sets
ITEM 1404 - FILTER FABRIC

1404.1 - Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing of one or more layers of material, each
so graded so as to function as an effective filter against the adjoining layers all in accordance
with this specifications and conforming to the thickness, elevations and extent shown on the
Plans for the purpose of preventing the erosion of fine materials through adjoining coarser
materials.

The materials shall conform to the specifications stated below, otherwise the Engineer
shall require the contractor to procure a more suitable materials or add materials of such a grain
size to produce the required mixture before the work is commenced. In this case the contractor
shall provide the Engineer with all necessary information as to the composition arid quality of
tne materials he intends to use in the filters, as well as of the materials which will be used
adjacent to the filters.
The design .of a filter shall be in general be based on the following specification:
Hate Filter Fabric Type C50.002 or equivalent
Material: Warp - polyethylene

Weft – polypropylene
Colour: Black
Mesh size: U.V. stabilized
Permeability
to water +0.06 - 0.15 mm
D90: 240 um (Sieve analysis)
Tensile strength Warp - 230 daN/5cm
Weft - 260 daN/5cm
Weight: 225g/m
Standard Width: 350 mm
Make-up: Rolled in cardboard core

The filter shall be laid in such a way that the rules governing the design can be applied to
any position of the filter layer in situ.
Filters placed on the exposed slopes of areas reclaimed with dredged material shall
consisi of two layers, an inner layer 80 em. in thickness consisting of material graded according
to the attached diagram and an outer evenly graded layer of coarser materials, 6-20 em. in grain
size, making up the total filter thickness specified on the plans.

Filter materials shall be measured by the square metres of the thickness specified on the
plan either in vertical or sloping position perpendicular to the faces. Location and boundaries of
the filter shall be so designated on the Plan except work on additional areas in the original Plan
which are found necessary during construction shall be measured accordingly.

All work performed and measured as provided in the preceding section shall be paid for
at· the contract unit price per square metre for filter of the specified thickness, which price shall
include furnishing of labor, equipment, tools, materials, supplies and incidentals necessary to
complete the work.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
1404 Filter Material Square Metre
ITEM 1405 - REINFORCING MAT
1405.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing reinforcing material or fabric lining as a
layer on soils of low bearing capacity to improve its overall stability without the necessity of its
removal and to reduce settlement of the overlaying structure as bulkhead or roadway as indicated
in the plans and details or as directed by the Engineer.

Reinforcing material is woven from polyester yarns of high modulus of elasticity into a
heavy duty fabric with an extremely high strength at low strain. It has a good water permeability
and is resistant to chemical and bacteriological attach. Depending on the structure to be
supported, the tensile strength is as specified on the plan with an specified elongation.
The supplier shall furnish the certified manufacturers test on the material showing results
of all physical test made, as required and certified by the official authorized to bind the
manufacturing company.

For coastal construction like bulkheads, breakwater and causeways, standard widths can
be assembled to form a large mat of the required width which can be easily sunk from a barge
winching itself away from the structure. Immediately after sinking, the mat is anchored by
dumping stones on top of it.
For roadways construction over soft foundation reinforcing mat with the use of cranes
maybe laid longitudinally. Without special equipment the mat are laid with a small overlap at a
right angle to the centerline of the roadway or embankment. The top soil or filling is dump on
top and the equipment can work on top during construction.
For high retaining walls construction with roadway reinforcing mat shall consists of
horizontal layers that contain the compacted earth fill with one side of the mat being folded back
as anchor around the exposed edge. The exposed surface shall be covered with earth and suitable
vegetation or protected by acceptable means as stated on the plans.

The reinforcing mat shall be measured by the number of square metres placed on top of
the foundation below the fill materials including overlaps and folds or anchor lengths in
accordance with the details shown on the plans and accepted.

The reinforcing mat measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unifprice
per square metre of mat which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing and placing the filter fabric and all labor, equipment, tools, additional material,
including the necessary superintendence and equipment during and up to the completion of
dredging operations and all other incidental necessary to complete the item as placed and
accepted.
Pay Item No. and Description Unit of Measurement
1405 Reinforcing Materials Square Metre
ITEM 1406 - DEFLECTOR WALL, BULKHEAD CURBS, AND STAIR LANDING
1406.1 Description
This item consists of concrete Deflector Walls, Concrete Bulkhead Curbs,and Concrete
Stair Landings in accordance with the approved Plans and Specifications.

Concrete used in this item shall conform with the specifications for Class A concrete.
Reinforcing steel shall conform with the requirements of Item 404, of Volume II. "Reinforcing
Steel".

Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs,and Stair Landing shall include all works constructed on
top of the rock bulkheads.
In no case shall these structures be placed on top of the bulkheads unless a minimum
period of one year had elapsed from the completion of the bulkheads or the bulkheads has
sufficiently settled.
The line, elevation and form of the Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs, and Stair Landings
shall be true to line or as shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, the top
shall be level and faces shall be vertical except the curve portion, if any. Special care shall be
exercised to smooth and tightfitting forms which can be held rigidly to line and grade and
removed without injury to the concrete. Forms shall be of board, combination of G.1. sheets and
board or boards lined with suitable materials which will meet with the approval of the Engineer.
All corners of the finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut and shall be free from cracks,
spalls or other defects.
Concrete shall be mixed, placed and finished in accordance with the specifications for
Item 405,"Structural Concrete".

The quantity of Deflector Wall and Bulkhead curbs shall be measured in lineal metres in
its final position of the specified cross section and reinforcement as shown on the plans.
The quantity of Stair Landing shall be measured in linear meters of complete structures
including reinforcing bars constructed in its final location as per plans.
Deflector Wall, Bulkhead Curbs and Stair Landing measured as provided above shall be
paid at the contract unit price per lineal metre of structure placed or at the contract cost per unit,
which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing labor, equipment,
tools and materials and constructing complete as per plan and specification and accepted.
Pay Item No. & Description Unit of Measurement
1406(1 ) Deflector Wall Lineal metre

1406(2) Bulkhead Curbs Lineal metre
1406(3) Stair Landing Lineal meter
PART H - BULKHEADS
ITEM 1500 - SAND MATTRESS
1500.1 Description
This Item shall consist of sand or gravel fill or backfill material furnished and placed as
required on top of existing soft seabed material or to replace material encountered and found
unsuitable for foundation of bulkheads or breakwater and shall be constructed in accordance with
these Specifications and where shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer in writing.

Sand mattress shall be dredged non-cohesive material of such quantity that the angle of
internal friction will be at least 22° in place.
1500.3 Construction Methods

After the unsuitable material has been excavated and removed as required by the
Engineer or if no excavation is required, the sand mattress shall be placed and build-up to
required elevation.
Excavated surfaces for sand mattress should be backfilled at once to prevent sliding of
soft materials of the seabed and filling up the area.
These material shall be developed at the site of the proposed mattress, the first dumping shall be
right on the existing excavation if any or on the materials previously dumped or placed. The
process to continue until the mattress has attained the required elevation and shape shown on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer. An allowance of about 0.60 metres for possible settlement
of the mattress. has been assumed in the Plans.
The side slope as shown on the Plans ,shall be maintained as close as possible.
The contractor shall take all necessary care in dumping the materials for the mattress to
avoid losses thereof by wave action and current.
Any sand mattress material that is deposited at places other than those designated or approved by
the Engineer will not be paid for.
The volume to be paid for shall be the number of cubic metres, measured in final
position, of the special material actually furnished and placed as specified and directed
completed in the place and accepted and as determined by computing the volume of material by
the cross section average end area method based on the survey taken prior to filling after
dredging, if any and the survey as soon as practicable after the filling.

The volume measured as provided above shall be paid for the contract unit price per'
cubic metre for "Sand Mattress" which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing, hauling, and depositing the material, and for all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of

Measurement
1500 Sand Mattress cubic metre
ITEM 1501 - ROCKWORKS
1501.1 Description
This Item shall consist of quarried rocks, bulkheads or breakwaters constructed at the
locations indicated, in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with lines,
elevations, slopes, cross section and dimensions shown on the plan or as required by the
Engineer.
1501.2 Materials
1501.2.1 Rocks
a. Quality and Shapes of Rocks. Unless otherwise specifically stated, all rocks to be used
shall be hard, dUrable, and not likely to disintegrate in sea water. Class I & II rocks must
weigh not less than 1,900 kilogram per cubic metre solid (specific gravity - 1.9) or
approximately 19.05 kilo NeW10n (kN) per cubic meter of solid materials, while class III
rocks shall weigh not less than 1,500 kilograms per cubic metre (specific gravity - 1.5) or
approximately 15.09 kilo NeW10n (kN) per cubic meter of solid materials when
reasonably dig.
Rocks with specific gravity higner than those specified above will be accepted but
no increase iil the contract price will be made on this account.
Class I & II rocks shall be angular. Sub-angular rocks may be used subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Rounded or well rounded rocks will not be accepted.
b. Sizes of Rocks
Pieces of Class I rocks shall weigh not less than 1 tonne (1000 kilograms) and
above.
Class II rocks shall weigh not less than 50 kilograms (man size boulders) less than
1 tonne (1000 kilograms) Class III rocks shpll be of any size and shapes provided that the
larger piece shall weigh less than 50 kilograms and that not more than five percent (5%)
of the entire quantity thereof shall consist of pieces the least dimension of which is not
less than the size of pea gravel.
Quarry run may be considered class III rocks.
1501.2.2 Concrete Filler

The concrete filler for rocks bulkheads when required for the purpose I of preventing
escape of fill material, shall be class "B" concrete plus 10% additional cement conforming to the
requirements given under Item 405, "Structure Concrete," Volume II, of Standard Specifications
for the particular class given.
1501.3 Construction Methods
1501.3.1 Methods of Placing Class I & II Rocks

The larger pieces of facing rock (Class I or II) shall first be laid carefully along the toe of
the bulkhead with allowance being made for possible settlement.
These rows of large rocks shall be extended to maintain slightly in ac'vance of the
completed portion of the work. The larger pieces of rock shall be placed on the outer slope of the
bulkhead and they shall be laid so that their longest dimension will be approximately normal to
the plane of the face of the slope as indicated on the plans. The plane of the exposed faces of the
rocks shall conform approximately to the prescribed line and grades indicated on the plans, and
as stated out on the site by the Engineer.
No cutting, spoiling or coursing of the rocks will be required. The rocks shall be firmly bedded
into the slopes and against the adjoining rocks.
The works shall be done in a skillfull manner, which implies careful selection of the rocks to fit
properly together so that the finished surface shall be even and tight. When ever necessary, small
pieces of filler rocks shall be wedged firmly in between the facing rocks so that the latter shall be
in the stable position. Filler rocks shall be of the kind and type of the facing rock. Rocks shall not
be out on the faces of the bulkhead by more than 0.15 metres inward or outward.
1501.3.2 Method of Placing Class III Rock or Heating Rock.

Class III rocks may be placed simultaneously or before placing Class I & II rock3. The
larger pieces of Class III shall be placed at the bottom and against the inner slopes of Class I or II
rocks. Smaller size rocks should be used to fill the voids between the larger pieces. Rocks shall
not be out of line on the faces of the bulkheads by more than 0.15 meters inward or outward.
1501.3.3 Concrete Filler shall be used to fill crevices on the inside slope of the rocks to thickness
of 0.15 m. as shown on the plans or as directed' by the Engineer. The surface shall conform to
the slope. After grouting, the surface shall be cured as specified for "Structural Concrete," Item
405 of Standard Specifications for a period of at least 3 days.

The quantity to be paid for shall be the actual weight in tonne (Metric tons) of rocks
completed in place and accepted.
Before setting in place, the quantities of rocks shall be measured in tonne by the
displacement method if the method of hauling is by water craft. The dimension in the metric
system of the scows or barges used shall be taken before and after the rocks are unloaded with
the aid ofapproved gauges or graduated scales placed at the corners of the scows or barges. The
weight of rocks shall be computed from the differences of the observed displacement of the
barges when loaded and empty, and on assumed weight of the sea water of 1.025 tonne per cubic
metre.Quantities of rocks measured at the job site (and not elsewhere) sl1all be the basis of
measurement for the purpose of payment to contractor.
The weight of the rock at loading and job sites shall be determined as follows:
weight (tonne) - 1.025 x volume in cu. m of displaced sea water
If the method of hauling is by dump trucks, then the actual weight can be recorded by
truck scales.
It is understood and agreed that the contractor from' the time his scows or barges or
trucks are measured, shall assume full responsibility for the placing of the rocks into the
bulkhead. Any rocks misplaced or dumped out of the bulkhead alignment shall be retrieved and
placed in the bulkhead or deducted from the total weight of the rocks measured for payment, if
same can be declared as not hazardous to Navigation.
Projections extending beyond the faces of the bulkheads in excess of that allowed above
shall not be included.
Concrete shall no longer be measured but its volume can be fairly estimate depending on
the sizes of the rocks and shall be considered in the basis of Payment only.
Tell tales for the purpose of determining settlement may be required by the engineer but
no allowance is included.

Rocks shall be paid for at the contract unit price per tonne (metric ton), which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, hauling and placing all materials
including concrete filler and for all labor equipment tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the item.
Pay Item & Description Unit of Measurement
1501 (1) Rock works, class I rock tonne

(2) Rock works, class II rock tonne
(3) Rock works, class III rock tonne
ITEM 1502 - FILTER MATERIALS
1502.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing of one or more layers of materials, eilch
so graded so as to function as an effective filter against the adjoining layers all in accordance
with this specifications and conforming to the thickness, elevations and extent shown on the
plans for the purpose of preventing the erosion of fine materials through adjoining coarser
materials.

The materials shall conform to the specifications stated below, otherwise the Engineer
shall require the contractor to produce a more suitable material or add materials of such a grain
size to produce the required mixture before the work in commenced. In this case the contractor
shall provide the Engineer with all necessary information as to the composition and quality of the
materials he intends to use in the filters, as well as of the materials which will be used adjacent to
the filters.
The design of a filter shall be in general be based on the following grading requirements:
d’15 : do15 shall be 12 - 40 for OR

6 - 18 for OK
d'50 : do50 shall be 5 - 10 for SR
12 - 58 for OR
9 - 30 for OK
where d15 and d50 means the grain size in grading curve corresponding to 15% and 50%,
respectively.
Indexo indicate the material which shall be protected

Index' indicate the filter material
OR means evenly graded material of round grains.
OK means evenly graded material of rough grains.
SR means unevenly graded material of rough grains.

The filter shall be laid insuch a way that the rules governing the design can be applied to
any position of the filter layer in situ.
Filter placed on the exposed slopes of areas reclaimed with dredged material shall
consistof two layers, an inner layer 80 cm. in thickness consisting of material graded according
to the attached diagram and an outer. evenly graded layer of coarser materials, 6-20 cm. in grain
size, making up the total filter thickness specified on the plans.
Filter material shall be measured by the square metres of the thickness specified on the
plan either in vertical or sloping position perpendicular to the faces. Location and boundaries of
the filter shall be so designated on the plan except work on additional areas in the origirial plan
which are found necessary during construction shall be measured accordingly.

All work performed and measured as provided in the preceding section shall be paid for
at the contract unit price per square metre for filter of the specified thickness, which price shall
include furnishing of labor, equipment. tools materials, supplies and incidentals necessary to
complete the work.

Number Measurement
1402 Filter Material Sq. metre
ITEM 1503 - EXCAVATION FOR BULKHEADS AND RECLAMATION
1503.1 Description
This item shall consist of the removal and disposal of unsuitable material that may be
required for the construction of the bulkheads and reclamation works. It shall include all
necessary clearing and maitenance of the excavation prior to backfilling. It shall also include
removal of obstruction or parts thereof, as required. Materials such as weed, fine silt. much and
other superfluous materials are considered unsuitable material.

The seabed shall be excavated according to the cross sections shown on the plans or as
established by the Engineer with the appropriate dredges and attendant plants with which the
dredge and dispose the unsuitable material at a place shown on the plan or as directed by the
Engineer an overdredging of as much as .30 m beyond the limit required shall be paid for. In
case of overdredging wherein the limits required shall be paid for.
In case of overdredging wherein the limits and slope shown on the plan or as established. by the
Engineer are exceeded by more than 0.30 m, the area shall not be backfilled with the type of
material excavated but with good sand specified for sand mattress but shall not be included in the
payment.
The contractor shall submit before proceeding with the work under this item his proposed
method of excavation including drawings, and other details left open to his choice when not fully
shown on the Engineer's plans. Such method, drawings and details shall be approved by the
Engineer before actual work is started under this item.

The volume of excavation will be measured by the cubic metre in its original position for
materials actually excavated as herein provided and shall be determined by computing the
volume by the cross section average and area method.
The measurements shall not include the volume of additional materials removed resulting
from slides, slip and silting or filling due to the action, current, etc. or due to other causes which
may be attributed to the carelessness of the contractor.
The measurement shall not include the volume of any suitable material that maybe
excavated and later used for other purposes.

The volume measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
cubic metre for Excavation for Bulkness and Reclamation, which price and payment shall
constitute full compensation for all excavation, for backfilling in case of overdredging in excess
of the .30 m limit for surveys, for disposing of materials and materials and for furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item.
Pay Item No. & Description Unit of Measurement
1503 (1) Excavation for Cubic Metre

Bulkheads and
Reclamation
DIVISION IV - FLOOD CONTROL, DRAINAGE AND WATER SUPPLY

PART I - WATER SUPPLY
ITEM 1600 - EXCAVATION
1600.1 Description
This item shall consist of the necessary excavation for removal of all foundation of
materials of whatever nature encountered, including all obstructions of any nature that would
interfere with the proper execution and completion of the work.
1600.2.1 General
The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades shown on the
approved Plans and Specifications. Unless otherwise provided, the entire construction site shall
be stripped of all vegetation and debris and such materials shall be removed from the site prior to
performing any excavation. The Contractor shall furnish. place and maintain all supports and
shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavation, and all pumping, ditching or other
approved measures for the removal or exclusion of water, including taking care of storm water
and waste water reaching the site of work from any source so as to prevent damage to the work
and adjoining property.
The walls and faces of all excavation in which workers are exposed to danger from
unstable ground shall be guarded by means of shoring system, sloping of the excavation, or some
other acceptable methods.
The Contractor shall furnish, install and maitain such seething, bracing, etc., as may be necassary
to protect the workers and to prevent any movement of earth which could injure or delay the
work or endanger adjacent structures. In excavation which workers may be required to enter,
excavated or other materials shall be effectively stored and retained at least 600 mm or more
from the edge of the excavation and trenching operations shall conform to any and all national,
provincial and local safety requirements.
1600.2.2 Excavation Beneath Proposed Structures

Unless otherwise specified for a particular structure or ordered by the Engineer
excavation shall be carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where shown or
ordered, areas beneath proposed structures shall be over-excavated. After the required excavation
or over-excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified to the depth of 150
mm brought to optimum moisture content and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to one
hundred percent (100%) of maximum density.
1600.2.3 Excavation Beneath Areas to be Paved

Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base, if
such base is called for; otherwise it shall extend to the bottom of paving. After the required
excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified. brought to optimum
moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to one hundred percent (100%)
of maximum density.
1600.2.4 Pipeline Trench Excavation

Unless otherwise shown on the approved Plans. and Specifications or ordered by the
Engineer, excavation for pipeline shall be open-cut trenches. The bottom of the trench, including
any shoring shall have a minimum width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300 mm
and a maximum width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 600 mm.
except when otherwise shown or ordered by the designated/assigned Engineer, the bottom of the
trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. The trench bottom
shall be given a final trim using a string line for establishing grade, such that each pipe section
when first laid will be wholly in contact with the ground or bedding along the extreme bottom of
the pipe. Rounding out the trench to form a craddle shall not be required. The maximum amount
of open trench permitted at anyone time and in one location shall be 300 metres or the length
necessary to accommodate the number of pipes installed in one day, whichever is greater.
Barricades and warning lights satisfactory'to the designated/assigned Engineer shall be provided
and maintain for all trenches left open overnight except at intersections and driveways in which
case heavy steel plates, adequately braced bridges or other type of crossing capable of supporting
vehicular traffic shall be furnished as directed by the Engineer.
1600.2.5 Excavation in Lawn Areas

Where pipelines excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed and
stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material shall be placed on the lawn
provided a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect the lawn from damage.
The lawn shall not remain covered for more than 72 hours. Immediately after completion of
backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be'replaced in a manner so as to restore the
lawn as near as possible to its original condition.
1600.2.6 Rock Excavation

Rock excavation shall include removal and disposal of the following:
(1) all boulders measuring 0.25 cubic metre or more in volume: (2) All rock material in ledges,
bedding deposits and unstratified masses which cannot be removed without systematic drilling
and blasting,
1600.2.7 Excavation Beneath Proposed Concrete Reservoir

After the reservoir area has been stripped of all vegetation and debris.
as specified in subsection (1700.2.1), lawn and top soil from the top 600 mm of excavated soil
shall be removed and stockpiled for possible later use as fill on or around the reservoir and for
miscellaneous top soil.
Excavation under the reservoir shall extend to the bottom of the draindocklayer. After such
excavation had been completed, the exposed surface shall be rolled with heavy equipment to
provide a reasonably smooth surface for placement of draindock.

The quantity to be paid for shall be the volume of the materials excavated in cubic metre
calculated by multiplying the horizontal area of the bot1om of the structure or open-cut trench by
the average depth. The average depth shall be calculated from the finished surface of the grade
shown on the drawing or the original ground level, whichever is the lowest.

Payment for all work under this item shall be made at the contract.
unit price per cubic metre for earthwork which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete all work.

Number Measurement
1600 (1) Excavation Beneath Cubic metre

Proposed Structures
(2) Pipeline Trench Cubic metre
Excavation
ITEM 1601 - BACKFILL AND FILL
1601.1 Description
This item shall consist of all operations required to replace excavated and unsuitable
materials to fill up depression to grade or to built up low areas in accordance with the approved

The selected materials shall be free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation,or rocks
having maximum dimension larger than 150 mm.Materials placed within 150 mm of any
structure Or pipe shall be free from rocks or unbroken masses or earthly materials having
maximum dimensionlarger than 75 mm.

Backfill materials shall be laid in horizontal layers, not more than 200 mm in thickness
and compacted to 100 percent of maximum density and to be carried to the level of the
surrounding ground or to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings.
Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the structure has at1ained
sufficient strength to withstand the loads imposed.Special precaution shall be taken to prevent
any wedging action againstcompleted structures or facilities. In the course of filling, any sloped
surface in the excavation around structure shall be "cut into" horizontally with every layer
placed, in order to eliminate any wedge action.
Where the use of power driven compacting equipment would not be practical, layers or
materials shall be compacted by any other method which will produce the requirement for
compaction.

The quantity of backfill and fill materials to be paid for under this item shall be the
volume which were actually placed and accepted and computed by the average end-area
multiplied by total length.

Payment for all work under this item shall be paid at the contract price per cubic metre
for Backfill and Fill, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing,
hauling, depositing, compacting and leveling, tools and other incidentals necessary to complete
the item of work.

Number Measurement
1601 Fill and Backfill Cubic metre
ITEM 1602 -INSTALLATION OF PIPELINE
1602.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installation of all pipes, fittings, closure
pieces,bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointings materials and appurtenances ;',.
as shown and specified on the drawings, and as required by the designated!
assigned Engineer for a complete and workable piping system.
1602.2.1 Mortar Lined and Enamel or Mortar Coated Steel Pipe
1. General - Mortar lined and enamel or mortar coated steel pipe materials and method of
manufacture of straight pipe and pipe specials shall conform to Federal Specification SS-P385a
dated January 31, 1964 and Amendment-1 dated February 27, 1968 (herein After referred to as
"FED SPEC"), subject to the exception and supplemental requirements contained in the
following subsections.
The pipe, of the diameter and class shown, shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets if
required and all specials and bends shall be provided as shown. For pipe 350 mm in diameter and
larger, the nominal diameter specified or shown shall be the inside diameter after lining. Pipe
smaller than 350 mm in diameter may be furnishedin standard outside diameters. Plate thickness
specified or shown are nominal thickness. Shop drawings of all pipe and specials shall also be
furnished.
2. Cement - cement shall conform to ASTM C150 and shall be type 1 for pipe linings and
coatings.
3. Aggregate- aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33 to fine aggregates.
4. Cylinder Material - cylinder material shall be fabricated from hot rolled carbon steel sheets or
plates conforming to ASTM A570 Grades C,D or E, ASTM A283 Grade D; steel pipe
conforming to ASTM A 139 Grade B: or if approved by the designated/assigned Engineer, high
strength low-alloy steel conforming to ASTM A572 Grade 42.
5. Rubber Gasket - where rubber gaskets are provided, they shall be continuous ring type, made
of special composition rubber. The compound shall be of first grade natural crude, synthetic
rubber or a suitable combination thereof. The gasket shall be so formed and cured as to be
densed,homogenous, and have a smooth surface free of blisters, pit and other imperfections. The
gasket shall be of sufficient volume to fill substantially the recess provided when the joint is
assembled and shall be the sole element depended upon to make the joint water-tight. Gaskets
shall be furnished with the pipe.
The compound shall conform to the physical requirements listed below:
FED.TEST
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT VALUE METHOD STD.
No.601
Tensile Strength, Min.

Natural Rubber 15.85 MPa 4111
Synthetic Rubber and
Combination 14.47 MPa 4111
Ultimate Elongation,
percent min.
Natural 500% 4121
Synthetic & Combination 425% 4121
Shore Durometer,Type A 40-65% 3021
Compression Set,percent
of Original Deflection
Max. 20% 3111
Tensile strength after
aging percent of original
tensile strength, min.
(oxygen pressure test or 7111*
air heat test) 80% 7221**
* Time 48 hours temperature 70 degrees Centigrade (158 degrees F) 2.0 MPa

** 96 hours at 70 degrees Centigrade (156 degrees F)
6. Welded Joints - where welded joints are provided, weld bell type joints maybe used, or the
.bell may be cut back, or filler rod added so as to permit field weld between the bell and spigot
joint rings.
7. Lining - Except where otherwise specified or shown, lining thickness shall be as follows, with
a tolerance of plus or minus twenty-five percent (25%).
Nominal Pipe Lining Thickness (mm)

Diameter (mm)
under 300 6.0

300 to 400 13.0
over 400 19.0
8. Coating - The coating of Steel Pipe sh<lll be of coal tar enamel or cement mortar.
The pipe smaller than 450 mm diameter shall be factory coated with coal tar enamel and
bonded asbestos felt wrap as specified in AWWA Standard for Coal Tar Protective Coatings and
Linings for Steel Water Pipelines-Enamel and Tape-Hot Applied (AWWA C-203).
Pipe 450 mm diameter and larger, shall be factory coated with coal-tar enamel, fibrous
glass mat and bonded asbestos felt wrap as specified in said AWWA Standard.
Coating materials and method of application shall conform to said AWWA Standard
except where modified.
Except where otherwise specified or shown, coating thickness shall be 25 mm minimum.
Mortar for pipe coating shall consist of one (1) part cement to not more than three (3) parts sand
by weight.
9. Curing
The curing periods specified in the Federal Specification are minimum periods. Curing of
the Lining shall continue until the exterior coating is applied. The ends of the pipe shall be sealed
with heavy plastic sheet during and between placement of the coating and the time the pipe is
lowered into the trench. If pipe is steam-cured, recorder charts showing temperature and duration
of curing period.
10. Compressive Strength of Mortar
Cylinder shall be molded and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 or C109.
1602.2.2 Cast Iron Water Pipe

Bell and spigot cast iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of the following:
1. "Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds for Water or other Liquids" (A WW A
C-1 06) or "Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in SandLined Molds for Water or other
Liquids" (AWWA C-108), and as indicated in the Bid Schedules or
2. "ISO Recommendation R-13, Cast Iron Pipes, Special Castings and Cast Iron Parts for
Pressure Main Lines." The pipe shall be Class A, however, the hydrostatic test pressure
shall be 350 MPa for all sizes.
1602.2.3 Asbestos - Cement Water Pipe

Asbestos-cement water pipe shall C0nform to the late:;t edition of the following
specifications:
1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Recommendation R-160 "Asbestos-

Cement Pressure Pipe". Subject to the following additional requirements:
a. Classification Series II, Class 2.45 MPa

b. Internal Hydraulic Pressure Test: A test pressure of 2.45 MPa shall be applied to each
length of pipe. The test shall be performed in accordance with ISO 160. clause 2.6.1
except that the application and maintenance of the test pressure may iJe in -accordance
with AWWA C-400. Section 5.2.2.1, at the manufacturer's option.
c. Longitudinal Bending Test: A longitudinal bending test shall be perfor, ned on each
length of the pipe in sizes up to 200 mm diameter when the length exceed 3.0 m. The test
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C400 Section 5.2.3
Class 100.
d. Transverse Crushing Test: A transverse crushing test shall be performed as specified in
ISO R160. Clause 2,6.3. The number of test shall as specified in ISO clause 4.2.3.
e. Acceptance Test: The consignment shall be delivered with acceptance tests. as
specified in ISO R160 Section 4, subject to the additional requirements included herein.
f. Manufacturer's Certificate: The manufacturer shall supply the owner with a certificate
showing that the pipe has been tested in accordance with. and satisfies the requirements
of the specification as modified herein.
g. Pipe Joints: The tolerance on dimensions of pipe and couplings.
as well as the dimensions and specitications of rubber jointing rings, shall be such that an
Internal hydraulic pressure of 2.45 MPa can be maintained without leakage when the
pipes are set at the maximum angular deviation indicated by the manufacturer of the pipe.
1602.2.4 PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe
1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of "AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Q;hloride
(PVC) Pressure Pipe", 100 mm through 300 mm diame,ter (AWWA C-900) and shall be
pressure class 100 or 150 where shown 01;1 the drawings and as indicated in the Bid
Schedule. The pipe shall have steel pipe equivalent or cast iron equivalent outside
dimensions and furnished with rubber ring gasket joints.
Alternate outside diameter and wall thickness shown in the tabulation will be
allowed for the specified pressure class.
1602.2.5 Polyethelene (PE) Plastic Pipe
1. Polyethelene pipe shall be manufactured from Type IV, Class C, Grade P34 extrusion
compound as defined by ASTM 01248 with a hydrostatic design stress of 4.3 MPa.
Alternate polyethelene pipe extrusion compound PE 3408 according to the Plastic Pipe
Institute (PPI) with a hydrostatic design stress of 5.50 MPa may be used. All compound
used shall be virgin plastic. Clean rework material from the manufacturer's own pipe
production may be used so long as the original was virgin material and of the same type,
class and grade as required above. The pipe shall meet the requirements of the National
Sanitation Foundation for potable water use as tested by the National Institute of Science
and Technology (NIST) or other testing laboratories and shall be made from nontoxic,
non-lead baserj plasticiser approved by the Project Engineer.
2. Pipe dimension when measured to the methods as described in ASTM 02122,
polyethelene pipe shall conform to either of the following dimension depending on the
type of extrusion compound used as stipulated! above:
Extrusion Compound, Type IV, Class C,

Grade P34 (according to ASTM 01248)
Nominal Outside Wall Thickness

Size Diameter Thickness mm (max.)
(mm) (mm) (min.)
75 90 8.18 9.30
100 110 10.00 11.36
150 160 14.55 16.53
200 225 20.45 23.34
3. All polyethelene Pipes shall be rated for use with water at 23 degrees C and at a
minirnum working pressure of 1.10 MPa.
4. All PE pipes shall be Ciea'ily markedat inferval 01 notmore than 1.0 lineal metre with
nominal size, type of material, manufacturer's trade name and production code.
1602.3.1 Mortar Lines and Enamel or Mortar Coated Steel Pipe
1. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish and install all pipes, specials,
fittings, closures, pieces, values, supports, bolts.nuts. gaskets; jointing materials and all
other appurtenances as shown and as required to provide a complete and workable
installation.Where pipe support details are shown. the support shall conform thereto and
shall be placed as Indicated; provided, that the support for all exposed piping shall be
complete and adequate regardless of whether or not supporting devices are specifically
shown. Concrete thrust blocks. anchor blocks or welded joints shall be provided at all
junctions, changes in direction exceeding 11-1/2 degrees or whereotherwise shown. At all
times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, all openings into the pipe and at
the ends of the pipe in trenches or structures shall be kept tightly closed to prevent
entrance of animals and foreign materials. The Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions to prevent the pipe from floating due to water entering the trench from any
source, shall assume full responsibility for any damages due to this cause and shall at his
own expense restore and replace the pipe to its specified condition and grade if it is
displaced due to floating. The Contractor shall maintain the inside of the pipe free from
foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the Owner.
2. Trenches shall be in a reasonably dry condition when the pipe is laid. Necessary facilities
including slings shall be provided for lowering and properly placing the pipe section in
the trench without damage.The pipe sections shall be laid to the line and grade when
shown and they shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line.Immediately before
placing each section of pipe in final position for joining, the bedding for the pipe shall be
checked for firmness and uniformity of surface.
1602.3.2 Cast Iron Water Pipe

Cast iron and fitting shall be lined with cement mortar in accordance with the
requirement of the "Standard for Installation of Cast Iron Water Mains" (AWWA C-600).
1602.3.3 Asbestos - Cement Water Pipe

Asbestos-cement pipe shall be installed in accordance with the "Standard for Installation
of Asbestos-Cement Water Pipe" (AWWA C603), except that the pipe shall not be laid using
earth mounds.
Prior to installation, the asbestos-cement pipe and couplings and all rubber rings shall be
inspected for damages and defects in materials and workmanship. All damaged or defective
materials shall be rejected and removed from the jobsite.
Joints between asbestos-cement pipe to cast-iron valves and fittings shall be sealed with
rubber ring gaskets. After assembling the joint, the position of the rubber ring gaskets shall be
located at even distance from the face of the valve or fitting, for the full circumference of the
pipe.
1602.3.4 PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe
After a section of a pipe has been lowered into the prepared trench and immediately
before joining the pipe, the ends of the pipe to be joined shall be cleaned, and tHe rubber gasket
lubricated, with a vegetable compound soap all in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
instructions.Assembly of. the pipe length shall be in accordance with the recommendation of the
manufacturer of the type of the joint use, All special tools and appliances required for joining the
pipe shall be provided by the Contractor. When cutting or machining of the pipe is necessary,
only tools and methods recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer
shall be employed.
1602.3.5 PE (Polyethelene) Plastic Pipe

All PE pipes when supplied under the specification shall be joined employing either of
the following methods:
Butt-Fusion
When pipe supplied under this specification are installed and joined by this method, the
work shall be carried out only by well qualified personnel who adhere strictly to prescribed
working conditions using tools and procedures recommended by the manufacturer and approved
by the Engineer.
a. Equipment - the equipment needed shall be as described in ASTM D-2657.
b. General Procedure - The following procedures shall be followed when making butt-
fusion joint:
1. Wipe each pipe-end-clean, inside and outside to remove dirt, water, grease and other
foreign material.
2. Square the end of each pipe section to be fused using a fusing tool. Remove cuttings and
burns from pipe ends.
3. Check line-up of pipe-ends in fusion machine to see that pipe ends meet squarely and
completely over the entire surface to be fused. Two clamps should be used on each end of
pipe to be fused for sizes 100 mm and above.
4. Insert the heater plate between the aligned pipe ends. Bring and hold the pipes ends in
contact and allow pipe to heat and soften until a bead of molten plastic roll back from the
ends. This bead will be about 1.5 mm to 5.0 mm back from the end of the pipe depending
on size. Soften approximately 1.50 mm on all sizes up to 75 mm. On 75 mm to 150 mm
heat to 5.0 mm.Softening can be judged by the appearance of the pipe end as the material
softens. Both surfaces of the heater plate shall be cleaned and the temperature maintained
at 246 degrees C to 260 degrees C (475 degrees F to 500 degrees F.)
5. Carefully remove the pipe ends from the heater plate and remove the plate. If the
softened material sticks to the heater plate, discontinue the joint. Clean heater plate,
resquare pipe end and start over.
6. Bring the heated pipe ends together with the specified pressure to form a uniform double
head about 3.0 mm to 5.0 mm wide around the entire circumference of the pipe.
7. Allow the joint to cool and solidify while maintaining the pressure for the specified time.
Inspect the joint for a uniform non-porous appearance. If the joint appears faulty, cut the
joint out and repeat the procedure.
The quantity to be paid under this item shall be the length in metres of pipes in place
completed and accepted, measured from end to end of the pipeline~

The quantity determined as provided above, shall be paid for or the contract price per
metre for pipe actually installed and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
and installation of all pipes, fittings, closure pieces, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials and for
all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item No. and Name Unit of Measurement
1602-1Mortar lined and enamel Mortar

coated steel pipe
1602-2Cast Iron Water pipe metre
1602-3Asbestos-cement
water pipe metre
1602-4PVC Polyvinyl metre
Chloride pipe
1602-5 Polyethelene (PE)
Plastic pipe metre
ITEM 1603 -INSTALLATION OF VALVES
1603.1 Description
This item shall consist of the installation of valves in accordance with the plans/drawings
as directed by the Engineer.

All materials shall conform to AWWA and ISO specification for valve installation.

Valves shall be installed as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. All valves
shall be new and of current manufacture.
Flanged valves may be raised or plain faced with serrated gasket surface. Flanges of
valves for water working pressure of 1.20 MPa or less shall be faced and drilled to 560 N
American Standard dimension;
Flanges of valves for water working pressure greater than 1.20 MPa shall be faced and drilled to
1120 N American Standard dimension.
Each valve body shall be tested under a test pressure equal to twice its design working
pressure, except that gate valve shall be tested in accordance with "STANDARD GATE
VALVES FOR ORDINARY WATERWORKS SERVICES" (AWWA-C 500)
All buried valves shall be provided with an exterior protective coating.
When operating out of a buried valve is located more than 1.50 metres below ground
surface. as extension shall be Installed in the valve box.
The bottom of the extension shall be securely fastened to the operating nut of the valve and tile
top of the extension shall be centered in the valve box.
To permit operation of all buried valves regardless of depth. six (6) tee-handle valve keys
of sufficient length shall be furnished.
Valves shall be inspected in opened and closed position to ensure that all parts are in
good working condition, otherwise it will be replaced prior to installation. It shall alsb have the
interior cleaned of all foreign materials before installation.

The work to be paid item shall be the installation and the number of pieces installed.
Item and Description Unit of Measurement
Valve per piece
PART J - FLOOD CONTROL AND DRAINAGE
Part I-A - Earthwork
ITEM 1700 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Refer to ITEM 100, Part C, Volume II
ITEM 1701 - CHANNEL EXCAVATION
1701.1 Description
This item shall consist of excavation. removal and trimming of all classes of materials in
channel prism including placing or stockpiling of excavated suitable materials and disposal of
unsuitable or surplus materials to designated disposal areas all in accordance with these
Specifications and Plans or as established by the designated/assigned Engineer.
a) Where applicable, the Contractor shall excavate only after the area of operation has been
cleared and grubbed. The contractor must exercise care not to extend his excavation
beyond the right-of-way limits called for in the Plans. Excavation operations shall be
such that all materials suitable for embankment or backfilling and filling shall be
separated from objectionable materials which shall be disposed. All surface from
excavation shall be trimmed to the required slopes and grades within the specified
tolerances provided hereto.
b) Tolerance
Excavation sections, profiles and slopes shall be cut true and straight in conformity with
the lines and grades shown on the Plans within the following tolerances, as measured
normal to the excavated surfaces;
Item Tolerances
1. Profile of invert channels + 30 mm
2. SidEf slopes inside channel prism + 15 mm
3. Side slopes outside channel prism + 15 mm
c) Channel shall be excavated with the use of a appropriate mechanized excavating

equipment approved by the designated/assigned Engineer.

Channel excavation will be measured by volume in cubic metre of material excavated
from the channel prism to the neat lines and grades as shown on the Plans and as established by
the Engineer.
Hauling of excavated materials either for stockpiling or disposal to disposal areas
including trimming of side slopes in channel prism and channel bed shall be considered
subsidiary works under this item.

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1601.3 shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities.
The price and, payment shall be full compensation for the removal and disposal of the excavated
materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this item.
Pay Item Unit of

Number Description Measurement
1601 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic metre

1601 (2) Surplus Common
Excavation Cubic metre
1601 (3) Surplus Rock Cubic metre
1601 (4) Surplus Unclassified
Excavation Cubic metre
ITEM 1702 - STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
Refer to Item 103, Part C, Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 1703 - DREDGING
1703.1 - Description
This item shall consist of the excavation of river beds, bottom of creeks or esteros, and
other bodies of water for the purpose of deepening or removal of unsuitable soil layers and
disposal of same at areas shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.

1703.2.1 Construction Surveys and Reference Elevation
All elevations shall be referred to the datum plane specified on the Plans.
A pre-construction survey shall be undertaken by the Conractor under the control of the
Engineer to confirm that the work has been executed to the prescribed lines and grades at regular
intervals of time which serve as a basis for the computation of the actual volume of dredging
materials.
1703.2.2 Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and mobilize at the jobsite the minimum number and type of
dredging equipment specified in the information to Bidders.
Equipment necessary for the proper prosecution of the work shall be in good working
condition and shall have been approved by the Engineer, both as to type and condition, before
the commencement of the construction the Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient
equipment with corresponding experienced operators to enable continuous prosecution of the
work and its completion at the required contract time.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with boats, boatmen, laborers. materials necessary for
his inspection of the progres of the work and the measurement of the work completed.
Where the actual field condition so requires. addtional adequate equipment shall also be
provided by the Contractor.
1703.2.3 Execution of the Work

The dredging work shall start at the downstream section of the project and shall be
undertaken by the Contractor within the limits shown on the Plans and in accordance with the
Specifications and approved work schedule.
1703.2.4 Materials to be Dredged

If the dredged materials are scheduled to be used as fill material, any remarkable change
in the quality of the dredged materials shall be reported to the Engineer to obtain appropriate
direction.
1703.2.5 Dredging Tolerances (Over depth)

The dredging shall be executed according to the depth or elevations indicated on the
Plans. No elevation higher than the elevation indicated shall be tolerated.
An allowance of 200 mm shall be acceptable for overdredging, but in no case shall the
entire dredging area shall be dredged to allowable 200 mm tolerance. All quantities due to
overdredging shall be at the Contractor's expense.
In case of excessive overdredging (beyond the 200 mm tolerance) the Contractor shall on
his account backfill the overdredged areas and/or takes all necessary measures as approved by
the Engineer to protect the stability of nearby structures.
1703.2.6 Dredging Slopes

All dredging slopes shall be to the specified gradient and within the limits.specified.on
the approved Plans.
1703.2.7 Dredging Channels and Basins

The dredging operation shall start at the downstream reaches moving towards the
upstream reaches as practicble as possible. The theoretical boundaries of dredging are shown on
the approved Plans. The dredging shall be carried out to the specified depth with the permissible
overdredging specified in Sub-Section 1603.2.5.
The preferred degree of slope between the original bottom and the indicated dredging
level is 1. (vertical) to 4 (horizontal) for layers of clay and 1 to 6 for layer of sand and silty sand
and 1 to 10 for layers of mud or silt.
After dredging the river to the prescribed lines and grades, river banks shall be trimmed
manually to the lines and grades shown on the plans or as extablished by the Engineer.
1703.2.8 Dredging Adjacent River Training Structures

In addition to the requirements mentioned in Subsection 1603.2.7 the maximum
permissibleoverdredging is 200 mm. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of
any permanent structures on the subject area.
1703.2.9 Disposal of Spoils

To accomodate the dredged materials, small dikes and drainage system shall be
constructed in the approved spoil bank area. The spoil bank and the open drainage channel shall
be provided in the high water channel to facilitate the flow of water from the dredged material to
the river. Where needed, a drainage stilling basin shall be provided to minimize draining out of
the dredged soil material with the effluent through the drainage channel of the river.
During dredging operations, precautionary measures shall be observed to avoid the
destruction of small dikes due to water seepage or overtopping of the dike. The dredged
materials shall be deposited as flat as possible within the spoil bank area.

Dredging will be measured by cubic metre of the quantity actually dredged from the
original river bed to the neat lines and grades as shown on the Plans and as established by the
Engineer subject to the conditions of Subsections 1703.2.5 Dredging Tolerances.
1703.2.11 Basis of Payment

The cost of dredging shall be paid based on the computed volume of dredged materials
multiplied by the contract unit price for the particular pay item shown on the Bid Schedule.
which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for dredging, handling and disposal
including labor, equipment. tools and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

Number Measurement
1603 (1) Dredging-soils Cubic Metre
Unless otherwise specified, no fill materials shall be placed and no compaction shall be
permitted to adjacent to concrete for fourteen (14) days after placement of concrete. Compaction
of backfilling material palced above burried concrete, however, shall not be permitted to be
carried out with vibration except with the prior approval of the Engineer.
Trial Embankment
Before filling is stated, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer the equipment
and performance for spreading and compacting at least three (3) imposed layers of soil in which
test of standard and filled compaction shall be conducted. When different kind of soils are
encountered during the course of subsequent work when further trials shall be conducted.
Moisture Content Adjustment

The water content of earthfill materials, prior to and during compaction, shall be
disturbed uniformly througllout each layer of material. As far as practicable. the material shall be
brought to the proper moisture content to ensure adequate compaction effect in the excavation or
borrow areas.Supplementary watering or drying may be carried out on the embankment.
and such wetted or dried soil shall be the roughly mixed to attain uniform moisture content
distribution before compaction.
When each layer of material has been conditioned to have a moisture content in the
required range, it shall be compacted by the use of such equipment of sheepsfoot roller, rubber
tired or other approved roller as may be necessary to attain the compaction specified.
Soil Test
The owner shall provide all the testing equipment and apparatus necessary to carry out
various soil test. the Contractor shall shoulder all expenses incurred for carrying out said soil test
including the provision for the testing laboratory. all the testing staff, laborer and consumables
necessary for carrying out his test. All test result in the form of report shall be furnished to the
Owner. The Contractor is obliged to follow the result of the tests.
Expenses for extra soil test ordered by the Engineer for his own purpose shall be barned
by the Owner. However, obtaining samples and transporting of the same to tile laboratory shall
be borne by the Contractor.
The test to be performed by the Contractor prior to the commencement of the earthwork
and every time when the said characteristic’s changes., shall include the following:
(a) Field Density (unit weight) Test
(b) Compaction Test
(c) Particle size distribution test
(d) Specific gravity
(e) Moisture content test
(f) Liquid limit and plastic limit test
(g) Direct shear test or triaxial compression test
The field moisture content of the compacted fill shall be made at least once per 4000 to
6000 cubic meters of earthfill. The Engineer shall prepare soil test programme depending on the
quality of the Contractor's earthwork operation schedule.
Should test results prove that changes in the embankment material are necessary in order
to obtain the prescribed compacted fill, these changes of obtaining of suitable material shall be at
the Contractor's expense.

Measurement shall be done in cubic metre of embankment in its final accepted
compacted position (less the volume for gravel metal) regardless of the origin of the material and
the required degree of compaction.

The volume measured, regardless of the type of the embankment or origin of materials
whether from channel excavation. dredging, sideborrow, borrow haul or from overhaul, as
provided above shall be paid at the contract Unit Price per cubic metre which price and payment
shall constitute full compensation for any side borrow, borrow haul and overhaul operation made
stripping of foundations (where necessary) spreading, blending, moisture condtioning and
compaction and trimming of side slopes (where necessary including all labor, tools, equipment
and all incidentals and subsidiary works, necessary for the successfull of the work described
under this item. Provided, however, tbat payment shall only be made after presentation by the
Contractor of a certification issued by the DPWH Materials Testing Engineer to the effect that
the constructed embankment measured and covered by such progress payment has attained the
required degree of compaction.
ITEM 1705 - FILL AND BACKFILL
ITEM 1706 - HAULING AND DISPOSAUOVERHAUL
Refer to ITEM 107, Part C, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1707 - AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE
Refer to ITEM 200, Part C, Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 1708 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Refer to ITEM 201, Part C, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1709 - CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Refer to ITEM 202, Part C, Volume II (Blue Book)
PART I-B - BANK AND SLOPE PROTECTION WORKS
ITEM 1710 - RIPRAP ANDGROUTED RIPRAP
Refer to ITEM 504, Part G, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1711 - STONE MASONRY
Refer to ITEM 505, Part G, Volume II (Blue Book)
ITEM 1712 - CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION
ITEM 1713 - RUBBLE CONCRETE I SAND OR STONE MASONRY
ITEM 1714 - GABIONS
Refer to ITEM' 509, Part G, Volume II (Blue Book)

ITEM 1715 - FILTER FABRIC
Refer to ITEM 1404
ITEM 1716 - PILING
Refer to ITEM 400, Part F, Volume" (Blue Book)
ITEM 1717 - SHEET PILES
PART I-C - DRAINAGE WORKS
ITEM 1718 - PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
ITEM 1719 - UNDERDRAINS
ITEM 1720 - MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS
ITEM 1721 - CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
ReIer to ITEM 503, Part G, Volume II (Blue Book)

DPWH Volume 3

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DPWH Volume 3

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS

It is incumbent upon all engineers in the DPWH to familiarize themselves with

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURES

ITEM 800 - Clearing and Grubbing .................................... 2

PART B - PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS 8

ITEM 900 - Reinforced Concrete ......................................... 8

DIVISION II - BUILDINGS .................;.......................................... 16

PART C - FINISHING ..................................................................... 16

ITEM 1000 - Termite Control Work .................................... 16

PART D - ELECTRICAL................................................................. 113

ITEM 1100 - Conduits, Boxes and Fittings .......................... 113

PART E - MECHANICAL ................................ ................................ 123

ITEM 1200 - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration

DIVISION II - PORTS AND HARBORS .................................. 146

PART F – PILING ………………………………………………… 146

ITEM 1300 - Piling To Include Sheet Piling ......................... 146

PART G - PROTECTIVE WORKS AND ACCESSORIES .............. 158

ITEM 1400: Mooring Fixtures ........................................... 158

PART H - BULKHEADS ........................................................... 169

ITEM 1500 - Sand Mattress ....................................... 169

DIVISION IV - FLOOD CONTROL, DRAINAGE .

PART I - WATER SUPPLY....................................................... 176

ITEM 1600 - Excavation .................................................... 176

PART J - FLOOD CONTROL AND DRAINAGE ..................... 188

PART I-A - Earthwork .............................................................. 188

ITEM 1700 - Clearing and Grubbing .................................. 188

PART I - B - Bank and Slope Protection Works ....................... 196

ITEM 1710 - Riprap and Grouted Riprap ........................... 196

PART I - C - Drainage Works .......................................................... 197

ITEM 1718 - Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains .................... 197

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS

These Specifications cover public works construction such as buildings,

Unless otherwise provided herein, all applicable provisions of Volume II -

ITEM 800 –CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Refer to Item 100, Part C of Volume II (Blue Book)

ITEM 801 - REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

Refer to Item 101, Part C of Volume II (Blue Book)

ITEM 802 – EXCAVATION

Refer to Item 102, Part C of Volume II (Blue Book)

ITEM 803 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

Refer to Item 103, Part C of Volume II (Blue Book)

ITEM 804 – EMBANKMENT

Refer to Item 104, Part C of Volume II (Blue Book)

ITEM 805 – DREDGING

805.2 Construction Requirements

805.2.1 Construction Survey and Reference Elevation

805.2.3 Execution of the Work

805.2.5 Dredging Tolerances (Over depth)

805.2.6 Dredging Slopes

805.2.7 Dredging Basins

805.2.8 Dredging Adjacent Waterfront Structures

- The width of the berm and strip shall be as follows:

Rubble Mound Structure 5m 10m

805.2.9 Disposal of Spoils

805.2.10 Articles of Value or Wreckage

805.3 Method of Measurement

805.4 Basis of Payment

Payment Item Description Pay Unit

805 (1) Dredging – soils m3

ITEM 806 - RECLAMATION

806.2 Materials Requirements

806.3 Construction Requirements